Details | Last modification | View Log | RSS feed
| Rev | Author | Line No. | Line |
|---|---|---|---|
| 14 | pmbaty | 1 | /*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\ |
| 2 | |* *| |
||
| 3 | |* Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM *| |
||
| 4 | |* Exceptions. *| |
||
| 5 | |* See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. *| |
||
| 6 | |* SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception *| |
||
| 7 | |* *| |
||
| 8 | |*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*| |
||
| 9 | |* *| |
||
| 10 | |* This header provides a public interface to a Clang library for extracting *| |
||
| 11 | |* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *| |
||
| 12 | |* Clang C++ API. *| |
||
| 13 | |* *| |
||
| 14 | \*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/ |
||
| 15 | |||
| 16 | #ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
||
| 17 | #define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
||
| 18 | |||
| 19 | #include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h" |
||
| 20 | #include "clang-c/CXDiagnostic.h" |
||
| 21 | #include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h" |
||
| 22 | #include "clang-c/CXFile.h" |
||
| 23 | #include "clang-c/CXSourceLocation.h" |
||
| 24 | #include "clang-c/CXString.h" |
||
| 25 | #include "clang-c/ExternC.h" |
||
| 26 | #include "clang-c/Platform.h" |
||
| 27 | |||
| 28 | /** |
||
| 29 | * The version constants for the libclang API. |
||
| 30 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions. |
||
| 31 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes. |
||
| 32 | * |
||
| 33 | * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI |
||
| 34 | * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable. |
||
| 35 | */ |
||
| 36 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0 |
||
| 37 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 63 |
||
| 38 | |||
| 39 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) (((major)*10000) + ((minor)*1)) |
||
| 40 | |||
| 41 | #define CINDEX_VERSION \ |
||
| 42 | CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
||
| 43 | |||
| 44 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) #major "." #minor |
||
| 45 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \ |
||
| 46 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) |
||
| 47 | |||
| 48 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING \ |
||
| 49 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
||
| 50 | |||
| 51 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_BEGIN |
||
| 52 | |||
| 53 | /** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang |
||
| 54 | * |
||
| 55 | * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes |
||
| 56 | * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST), |
||
| 57 | * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating |
||
| 58 | * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other |
||
| 59 | * facilities that support Clang-based development tools. |
||
| 60 | * |
||
| 61 | * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information |
||
| 62 | * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to |
||
| 63 | * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next, |
||
| 64 | * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools. |
||
| 65 | * |
||
| 66 | * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and |
||
| 67 | * functions are prefixed with "clang_". |
||
| 68 | * |
||
| 69 | * @{ |
||
| 70 | */ |
||
| 71 | |||
| 72 | /** |
||
| 73 | * An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would |
||
| 74 | * typically be linked together into an executable or library. |
||
| 75 | */ |
||
| 76 | typedef void *CXIndex; |
||
| 77 | |||
| 78 | /** |
||
| 79 | * An opaque type representing target information for a given translation |
||
| 80 | * unit. |
||
| 81 | */ |
||
| 82 | typedef struct CXTargetInfoImpl *CXTargetInfo; |
||
| 83 | |||
| 84 | /** |
||
| 85 | * A single translation unit, which resides in an index. |
||
| 86 | */ |
||
| 87 | typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit; |
||
| 88 | |||
| 89 | /** |
||
| 90 | * Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through |
||
| 91 | * to various callbacks and visitors. |
||
| 92 | */ |
||
| 93 | typedef void *CXClientData; |
||
| 94 | |||
| 95 | /** |
||
| 96 | * Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk. |
||
| 97 | * |
||
| 98 | * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the |
||
| 99 | * system along with the current contents of that file that have not |
||
| 100 | * yet been saved to disk. |
||
| 101 | */ |
||
| 102 | struct CXUnsavedFile { |
||
| 103 | /** |
||
| 104 | * The file whose contents have not yet been saved. |
||
| 105 | * |
||
| 106 | * This file must already exist in the file system. |
||
| 107 | */ |
||
| 108 | const char *Filename; |
||
| 109 | |||
| 110 | /** |
||
| 111 | * A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file. |
||
| 112 | */ |
||
| 113 | const char *Contents; |
||
| 114 | |||
| 115 | /** |
||
| 116 | * The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer. |
||
| 117 | */ |
||
| 118 | unsigned long Length; |
||
| 119 | }; |
||
| 120 | |||
| 121 | /** |
||
| 122 | * Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates |
||
| 123 | * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to |
||
| 124 | * it being deprecated or unavailable. |
||
| 125 | */ |
||
| 126 | enum CXAvailabilityKind { |
||
| 127 | /** |
||
| 128 | * The entity is available. |
||
| 129 | */ |
||
| 130 | CXAvailability_Available, |
||
| 131 | /** |
||
| 132 | * The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is |
||
| 133 | * not recommended). |
||
| 134 | */ |
||
| 135 | CXAvailability_Deprecated, |
||
| 136 | /** |
||
| 137 | * The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error. |
||
| 138 | */ |
||
| 139 | CXAvailability_NotAvailable, |
||
| 140 | /** |
||
| 141 | * The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be |
||
| 142 | * an error. |
||
| 143 | */ |
||
| 144 | CXAvailability_NotAccessible |
||
| 145 | }; |
||
| 146 | |||
| 147 | /** |
||
| 148 | * Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor. |
||
| 149 | */ |
||
| 150 | typedef struct CXVersion { |
||
| 151 | /** |
||
| 152 | * The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative |
||
| 153 | * value indicates that there is no version number at all. |
||
| 154 | */ |
||
| 155 | int Major; |
||
| 156 | /** |
||
| 157 | * The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value |
||
| 158 | * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for |
||
| 159 | * version '10'. |
||
| 160 | */ |
||
| 161 | int Minor; |
||
| 162 | /** |
||
| 163 | * The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value |
||
| 164 | * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided, |
||
| 165 | * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'. |
||
| 166 | */ |
||
| 167 | int Subminor; |
||
| 168 | } CXVersion; |
||
| 169 | |||
| 170 | /** |
||
| 171 | * Describes the exception specification of a cursor. |
||
| 172 | * |
||
| 173 | * A negative value indicates that the cursor is not a function declaration. |
||
| 174 | */ |
||
| 175 | enum CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind { |
||
| 176 | /** |
||
| 177 | * The cursor has no exception specification. |
||
| 178 | */ |
||
| 179 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_None, |
||
| 180 | |||
| 181 | /** |
||
| 182 | * The cursor has exception specification throw() |
||
| 183 | */ |
||
| 184 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_DynamicNone, |
||
| 185 | |||
| 186 | /** |
||
| 187 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(T1, T2) |
||
| 188 | */ |
||
| 189 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Dynamic, |
||
| 190 | |||
| 191 | /** |
||
| 192 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(...). |
||
| 193 | */ |
||
| 194 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_MSAny, |
||
| 195 | |||
| 196 | /** |
||
| 197 | * The cursor has exception specification basic noexcept. |
||
| 198 | */ |
||
| 199 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_BasicNoexcept, |
||
| 200 | |||
| 201 | /** |
||
| 202 | * The cursor has exception specification computed noexcept. |
||
| 203 | */ |
||
| 204 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_ComputedNoexcept, |
||
| 205 | |||
| 206 | /** |
||
| 207 | * The exception specification has not yet been evaluated. |
||
| 208 | */ |
||
| 209 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unevaluated, |
||
| 210 | |||
| 211 | /** |
||
| 212 | * The exception specification has not yet been instantiated. |
||
| 213 | */ |
||
| 214 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Uninstantiated, |
||
| 215 | |||
| 216 | /** |
||
| 217 | * The exception specification has not been parsed yet. |
||
| 218 | */ |
||
| 219 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unparsed, |
||
| 220 | |||
| 221 | /** |
||
| 222 | * The cursor has a __declspec(nothrow) exception specification. |
||
| 223 | */ |
||
| 224 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_NoThrow |
||
| 225 | }; |
||
| 226 | |||
| 227 | /** |
||
| 228 | * Provides a shared context for creating translation units. |
||
| 229 | * |
||
| 230 | * It provides two options: |
||
| 231 | * |
||
| 232 | * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local" |
||
| 233 | * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration |
||
| 234 | * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled |
||
| 235 | * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations |
||
| 236 | * will be enumerated. |
||
| 237 | * |
||
| 238 | * Here is an example: |
||
| 239 | * |
||
| 240 | * \code |
||
| 241 | * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1 |
||
| 242 | * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1); |
||
| 243 | * |
||
| 244 | * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command: |
||
| 245 | * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch" |
||
| 246 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch"); |
||
| 247 | * |
||
| 248 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch' |
||
| 249 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
||
| 250 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
||
| 251 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
||
| 252 | * |
||
| 253 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols |
||
| 254 | * // from 'IndexTest.pch'. |
||
| 255 | * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" }; |
||
| 256 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args, |
||
| 257 | * 0, 0); |
||
| 258 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
||
| 259 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
||
| 260 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
||
| 261 | * \endcode |
||
| 262 | * |
||
| 263 | * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via |
||
| 264 | * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks |
||
| 265 | * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler). |
||
| 266 | */ |
||
| 267 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH, |
||
| 268 | int displayDiagnostics); |
||
| 269 | |||
| 270 | /** |
||
| 271 | * Destroy the given index. |
||
| 272 | * |
||
| 273 | * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created |
||
| 274 | * within that index have been destroyed. |
||
| 275 | */ |
||
| 276 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index); |
||
| 277 | |||
| 278 | typedef enum { |
||
| 279 | /** |
||
| 280 | * Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed. |
||
| 281 | */ |
||
| 282 | CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0, |
||
| 283 | |||
| 284 | /** |
||
| 285 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing |
||
| 286 | * purposes should use background priority. |
||
| 287 | * |
||
| 288 | * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit, |
||
| 289 | * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
||
| 290 | */ |
||
| 291 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1, |
||
| 292 | |||
| 293 | /** |
||
| 294 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing |
||
| 295 | * purposes should use background priority. |
||
| 296 | * |
||
| 297 | * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt, |
||
| 298 | * #clang_annotateTokens |
||
| 299 | */ |
||
| 300 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2, |
||
| 301 | |||
| 302 | /** |
||
| 303 | * Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use |
||
| 304 | * background priority. |
||
| 305 | */ |
||
| 306 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll = |
||
| 307 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing | |
||
| 308 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing |
||
| 309 | |||
| 310 | } CXGlobalOptFlags; |
||
| 311 | |||
| 312 | /** |
||
| 313 | * Sets general options associated with a CXIndex. |
||
| 314 | * |
||
| 315 | * For example: |
||
| 316 | * \code |
||
| 317 | * CXIndex idx = ...; |
||
| 318 | * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx, |
||
| 319 | * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) | |
||
| 320 | * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing); |
||
| 321 | * \endcode |
||
| 322 | * |
||
| 323 | * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags. |
||
| 324 | */ |
||
| 325 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options); |
||
| 326 | |||
| 327 | /** |
||
| 328 | * Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex. |
||
| 329 | * |
||
| 330 | * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that |
||
| 331 | * are associated with the given CXIndex object. |
||
| 332 | */ |
||
| 333 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex); |
||
| 334 | |||
| 335 | /** |
||
| 336 | * Sets the invocation emission path option in a CXIndex. |
||
| 337 | * |
||
| 338 | * The invocation emission path specifies a path which will contain log |
||
| 339 | * files for certain libclang invocations. A null value (default) implies that |
||
| 340 | * libclang invocations are not logged.. |
||
| 341 | */ |
||
| 342 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
| 343 | clang_CXIndex_setInvocationEmissionPathOption(CXIndex, const char *Path); |
||
| 344 | |||
| 345 | /** |
||
| 346 | * Determine whether the given header is guarded against |
||
| 347 | * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional |
||
| 348 | * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once. |
||
| 349 | */ |
||
| 350 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 351 | CXFile file); |
||
| 352 | |||
| 353 | /** |
||
| 354 | * Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit. |
||
| 355 | * |
||
| 356 | * \param tu the translation unit |
||
| 357 | * |
||
| 358 | * \param file_name the name of the file. |
||
| 359 | * |
||
| 360 | * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu, |
||
| 361 | * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit. |
||
| 362 | */ |
||
| 363 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 364 | const char *file_name); |
||
| 365 | |||
| 366 | /** |
||
| 367 | * Retrieve the buffer associated with the given file. |
||
| 368 | * |
||
| 369 | * \param tu the translation unit |
||
| 370 | * |
||
| 371 | * \param file the file for which to retrieve the buffer. |
||
| 372 | * |
||
| 373 | * \param size [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the size of the buffer. |
||
| 374 | * |
||
| 375 | * \returns a pointer to the buffer in memory that holds the contents of |
||
| 376 | * \p file, or a NULL pointer when the file is not loaded. |
||
| 377 | */ |
||
| 378 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_getFileContents(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 379 | CXFile file, size_t *size); |
||
| 380 | |||
| 381 | /** |
||
| 382 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column |
||
| 383 | * in a particular translation unit. |
||
| 384 | */ |
||
| 385 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 386 | CXFile file, unsigned line, |
||
| 387 | unsigned column); |
||
| 388 | /** |
||
| 389 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset |
||
| 390 | * in a particular translation unit. |
||
| 391 | */ |
||
| 392 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 393 | CXFile file, |
||
| 394 | unsigned offset); |
||
| 395 | |||
| 396 | /** |
||
| 397 | * Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor. |
||
| 398 | * |
||
| 399 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
||
| 400 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
||
| 401 | */ |
||
| 402 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 403 | CXFile file); |
||
| 404 | |||
| 405 | /** |
||
| 406 | * Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the |
||
| 407 | * preprocessor. |
||
| 408 | * |
||
| 409 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
||
| 410 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
||
| 411 | */ |
||
| 412 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList * |
||
| 413 | clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu); |
||
| 414 | |||
| 415 | /** |
||
| 416 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given |
||
| 417 | * translation unit. |
||
| 418 | */ |
||
| 419 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
||
| 420 | |||
| 421 | /** |
||
| 422 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit. |
||
| 423 | * |
||
| 424 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
||
| 425 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
||
| 426 | * |
||
| 427 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
||
| 428 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
||
| 429 | */ |
||
| 430 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit, |
||
| 431 | unsigned Index); |
||
| 432 | |||
| 433 | /** |
||
| 434 | * Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a |
||
| 435 | * translation unit. |
||
| 436 | * |
||
| 437 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
||
| 438 | */ |
||
| 439 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet |
||
| 440 | clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
||
| 441 | |||
| 442 | /** |
||
| 443 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation |
||
| 444 | * |
||
| 445 | * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy |
||
| 446 | * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or |
||
| 447 | * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit. |
||
| 448 | * |
||
| 449 | * @{ |
||
| 450 | */ |
||
| 451 | |||
| 452 | /** |
||
| 453 | * Get the original translation unit source file name. |
||
| 454 | */ |
||
| 455 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
| 456 | clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
||
| 457 | |||
| 458 | /** |
||
| 459 | * Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided |
||
| 460 | * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler. |
||
| 461 | * |
||
| 462 | * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a |
||
| 463 | * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the |
||
| 464 | * specified command line arguments. |
||
| 465 | * |
||
| 466 | * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options |
||
| 467 | * are ignored: |
||
| 468 | * |
||
| 469 | * '-c' |
||
| 470 | * '-emit-ast' |
||
| 471 | * '-fsyntax-only' |
||
| 472 | * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored) |
||
| 473 | * |
||
| 474 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
||
| 475 | * associated. |
||
| 476 | * |
||
| 477 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
||
| 478 | * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args. |
||
| 479 | * |
||
| 480 | * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
||
| 481 | * \p clang_command_line_args. |
||
| 482 | * |
||
| 483 | * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
||
| 484 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
||
| 485 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
||
| 486 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
||
| 487 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
||
| 488 | * |
||
| 489 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
| 490 | * unsaved_files. |
||
| 491 | * |
||
| 492 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
| 493 | * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of |
||
| 494 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
| 495 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
| 496 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
| 497 | */ |
||
| 498 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile( |
||
| 499 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, int num_clang_command_line_args, |
||
| 500 | const char *const *clang_command_line_args, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
| 501 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files); |
||
| 502 | |||
| 503 | /** |
||
| 504 | * Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns |
||
| 505 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
||
| 506 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
||
| 507 | * error codes. |
||
| 508 | */ |
||
| 509 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit |
||
| 510 | clang_createTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename); |
||
| 511 | |||
| 512 | /** |
||
| 513 | * Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast). |
||
| 514 | * |
||
| 515 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
||
| 516 | * \c CXTranslationUnit. |
||
| 517 | * |
||
| 518 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
||
| 519 | */ |
||
| 520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode |
||
| 521 | clang_createTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename, |
||
| 522 | CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
| 523 | |||
| 524 | /** |
||
| 525 | * Flags that control the creation of translation units. |
||
| 526 | * |
||
| 527 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
| 528 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
| 529 | * constructing the translation unit. |
||
| 530 | */ |
||
| 531 | enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags { |
||
| 532 | /** |
||
| 533 | * Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are |
||
| 534 | * needed. |
||
| 535 | */ |
||
| 536 | CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0, |
||
| 537 | |||
| 538 | /** |
||
| 539 | * Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed" |
||
| 540 | * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations. |
||
| 541 | * |
||
| 542 | * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory |
||
| 543 | * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record |
||
| 544 | * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for |
||
| 545 | * applications that require more detailed information about the |
||
| 546 | * behavior of the preprocessor. |
||
| 547 | */ |
||
| 548 | CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01, |
||
| 549 | |||
| 550 | /** |
||
| 551 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete. |
||
| 552 | * |
||
| 553 | * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic |
||
| 554 | * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the |
||
| 555 | * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses |
||
| 556 | * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of |
||
| 557 | * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in |
||
| 558 | * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the |
||
| 559 | * intent of producing a precompiled header. |
||
| 560 | */ |
||
| 561 | CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02, |
||
| 562 | |||
| 563 | /** |
||
| 564 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an |
||
| 565 | * implicit precompiled header for the preamble. |
||
| 566 | * |
||
| 567 | * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a |
||
| 568 | * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times |
||
| 569 | * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an |
||
| 570 | * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the |
||
| 571 | * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as |
||
| 572 | * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the |
||
| 573 | * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c |
||
| 574 | * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit |
||
| 575 | * precompiled header to improve parsing performance. |
||
| 576 | */ |
||
| 577 | CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04, |
||
| 578 | |||
| 579 | /** |
||
| 580 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some |
||
| 581 | * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file. |
||
| 582 | * |
||
| 583 | * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that |
||
| 584 | * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of |
||
| 585 | * code-completion operations. |
||
| 586 | */ |
||
| 587 | CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08, |
||
| 588 | |||
| 589 | /** |
||
| 590 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with |
||
| 591 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
||
| 592 | * |
||
| 593 | * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of |
||
| 594 | * producing a precompiled header. |
||
| 595 | */ |
||
| 596 | CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10, |
||
| 597 | |||
| 598 | /** |
||
| 599 | * DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++. |
||
| 600 | * |
||
| 601 | * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while |
||
| 602 | * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated. |
||
| 603 | */ |
||
| 604 | CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20, |
||
| 605 | |||
| 606 | /** |
||
| 607 | * Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while |
||
| 608 | * parsing. |
||
| 609 | * |
||
| 610 | * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while |
||
| 611 | * ignoring the usages. |
||
| 612 | */ |
||
| 613 | CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40, |
||
| 614 | |||
| 615 | /** |
||
| 616 | * Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be |
||
| 617 | * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation |
||
| 618 | * unit. |
||
| 619 | */ |
||
| 620 | CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80, |
||
| 621 | |||
| 622 | /** |
||
| 623 | * Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on |
||
| 624 | * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This |
||
| 625 | * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for |
||
| 626 | * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble). |
||
| 627 | */ |
||
| 628 | CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100, |
||
| 629 | |||
| 630 | /** |
||
| 631 | * Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered. |
||
| 632 | * |
||
| 633 | * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit, |
||
| 634 | * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common |
||
| 635 | * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the |
||
| 636 | * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information |
||
| 637 | * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior. |
||
| 638 | */ |
||
| 639 | CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200, |
||
| 640 | |||
| 641 | /** |
||
| 642 | * Sets the preprocessor in a mode for parsing a single file only. |
||
| 643 | */ |
||
| 644 | CXTranslationUnit_SingleFileParse = 0x400, |
||
| 645 | |||
| 646 | /** |
||
| 647 | * Used in combination with CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies to |
||
| 648 | * constrain the skipping of function bodies to the preamble. |
||
| 649 | * |
||
| 650 | * The function bodies of the main file are not skipped. |
||
| 651 | */ |
||
| 652 | CXTranslationUnit_LimitSkipFunctionBodiesToPreamble = 0x800, |
||
| 653 | |||
| 654 | /** |
||
| 655 | * Used to indicate that attributed types should be included in CXType. |
||
| 656 | */ |
||
| 657 | CXTranslationUnit_IncludeAttributedTypes = 0x1000, |
||
| 658 | |||
| 659 | /** |
||
| 660 | * Used to indicate that implicit attributes should be visited. |
||
| 661 | */ |
||
| 662 | CXTranslationUnit_VisitImplicitAttributes = 0x2000, |
||
| 663 | |||
| 664 | /** |
||
| 665 | * Used to indicate that non-errors from included files should be ignored. |
||
| 666 | * |
||
| 667 | * If set, clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() will not report e.g. warnings from |
||
| 668 | * included files anymore. This speeds up clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() for |
||
| 669 | * the case where these warnings are not of interest, as for an IDE for |
||
| 670 | * example, which typically shows only the diagnostics in the main file. |
||
| 671 | */ |
||
| 672 | CXTranslationUnit_IgnoreNonErrorsFromIncludedFiles = 0x4000, |
||
| 673 | |||
| 674 | /** |
||
| 675 | * Tells the preprocessor not to skip excluded conditional blocks. |
||
| 676 | */ |
||
| 677 | CXTranslationUnit_RetainExcludedConditionalBlocks = 0x8000 |
||
| 678 | }; |
||
| 679 | |||
| 680 | /** |
||
| 681 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation |
||
| 682 | * unit that is being edited. |
||
| 683 | * |
||
| 684 | * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit() |
||
| 685 | * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times, |
||
| 686 | * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly |
||
| 687 | * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag |
||
| 688 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled |
||
| 689 | * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The |
||
| 690 | * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next. |
||
| 691 | */ |
||
| 692 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void); |
||
| 693 | |||
| 694 | /** |
||
| 695 | * Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns |
||
| 696 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
||
| 697 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
||
| 698 | * error codes. |
||
| 699 | */ |
||
| 700 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_parseTranslationUnit( |
||
| 701 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
| 702 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
| 703 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
| 704 | unsigned options); |
||
| 705 | |||
| 706 | /** |
||
| 707 | * Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
||
| 708 | * to that file. |
||
| 709 | * |
||
| 710 | * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the |
||
| 711 | * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be |
||
| 712 | * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of |
||
| 713 | * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same |
||
| 714 | * way that the compiler is configured on the command line. |
||
| 715 | * |
||
| 716 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
||
| 717 | * associated. |
||
| 718 | * |
||
| 719 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
||
| 720 | * source file is included in \c command_line_args. |
||
| 721 | * |
||
| 722 | * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
||
| 723 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
||
| 724 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
||
| 725 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
||
| 726 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
||
| 727 | * |
||
| 728 | * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
||
| 729 | * \c command_line_args. |
||
| 730 | * |
||
| 731 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
| 732 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
||
| 733 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
| 734 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
| 735 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
| 736 | * |
||
| 737 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
| 738 | * unsaved_files. |
||
| 739 | * |
||
| 740 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
||
| 741 | * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
||
| 742 | * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
||
| 743 | * |
||
| 744 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
||
| 745 | * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any |
||
| 746 | * diagnostics produced by the compiler. |
||
| 747 | * |
||
| 748 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
||
| 749 | */ |
||
| 750 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2( |
||
| 751 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
| 752 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
| 753 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
| 754 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
| 755 | |||
| 756 | /** |
||
| 757 | * Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line |
||
| 758 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
||
| 759 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
||
| 760 | */ |
||
| 761 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv( |
||
| 762 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
||
| 763 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
||
| 764 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
| 765 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
||
| 766 | |||
| 767 | /** |
||
| 768 | * Flags that control how translation units are saved. |
||
| 769 | * |
||
| 770 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
| 771 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
| 772 | * saving the translation unit. |
||
| 773 | */ |
||
| 774 | enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags { |
||
| 775 | /** |
||
| 776 | * Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed. |
||
| 777 | */ |
||
| 778 | CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0 |
||
| 779 | }; |
||
| 780 | |||
| 781 | /** |
||
| 782 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation |
||
| 783 | * unit. |
||
| 784 | * |
||
| 785 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
||
| 786 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
||
| 787 | * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with |
||
| 788 | * the most commonly-requested data. |
||
| 789 | */ |
||
| 790 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
| 791 | |||
| 792 | /** |
||
| 793 | * Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to |
||
| 794 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit(). |
||
| 795 | */ |
||
| 796 | enum CXSaveError { |
||
| 797 | /** |
||
| 798 | * Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit. |
||
| 799 | */ |
||
| 800 | CXSaveError_None = 0, |
||
| 801 | |||
| 802 | /** |
||
| 803 | * Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save |
||
| 804 | * the file. |
||
| 805 | * |
||
| 806 | * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to |
||
| 807 | * write the file. |
||
| 808 | */ |
||
| 809 | CXSaveError_Unknown = 1, |
||
| 810 | |||
| 811 | /** |
||
| 812 | * Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt |
||
| 813 | * to save the translation unit. |
||
| 814 | * |
||
| 815 | * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be |
||
| 816 | * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic(). |
||
| 817 | */ |
||
| 818 | CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2, |
||
| 819 | |||
| 820 | /** |
||
| 821 | * Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow |
||
| 822 | * invalid (e.g., NULL). |
||
| 823 | */ |
||
| 824 | CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3 |
||
| 825 | }; |
||
| 826 | |||
| 827 | /** |
||
| 828 | * Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of |
||
| 829 | * that translation unit on disk. |
||
| 830 | * |
||
| 831 | * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved |
||
| 832 | * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a |
||
| 833 | * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or, |
||
| 834 | * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a |
||
| 835 | * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation |
||
| 836 | * units. |
||
| 837 | * |
||
| 838 | * \param TU The translation unit to save. |
||
| 839 | * |
||
| 840 | * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved. |
||
| 841 | * |
||
| 842 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
||
| 843 | * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
||
| 844 | * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
||
| 845 | * |
||
| 846 | * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError |
||
| 847 | * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was |
||
| 848 | * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred. |
||
| 849 | */ |
||
| 850 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
||
| 851 | const char *FileName, |
||
| 852 | unsigned options); |
||
| 853 | |||
| 854 | /** |
||
| 855 | * Suspend a translation unit in order to free memory associated with it. |
||
| 856 | * |
||
| 857 | * A suspended translation unit uses significantly less memory but on the other |
||
| 858 | * side does not support any other calls than \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit |
||
| 859 | * to resume it or \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit to dispose it completely. |
||
| 860 | */ |
||
| 861 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_suspendTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
| 862 | |||
| 863 | /** |
||
| 864 | * Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object. |
||
| 865 | */ |
||
| 866 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
| 867 | |||
| 868 | /** |
||
| 869 | * Flags that control the reparsing of translation units. |
||
| 870 | * |
||
| 871 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
||
| 872 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
||
| 873 | * reparsing the translation unit. |
||
| 874 | */ |
||
| 875 | enum CXReparse_Flags { |
||
| 876 | /** |
||
| 877 | * Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed. |
||
| 878 | */ |
||
| 879 | CXReparse_None = 0x0 |
||
| 880 | }; |
||
| 881 | |||
| 882 | /** |
||
| 883 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation |
||
| 884 | * unit. |
||
| 885 | * |
||
| 886 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
||
| 887 | * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
||
| 888 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses |
||
| 889 | * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version |
||
| 890 | * to the next. |
||
| 891 | */ |
||
| 892 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
| 893 | |||
| 894 | /** |
||
| 895 | * Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit. |
||
| 896 | * |
||
| 897 | * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally |
||
| 898 | * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files |
||
| 899 | * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The |
||
| 900 | * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it |
||
| 901 | * was originally parsed. |
||
| 902 | * |
||
| 903 | * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations |
||
| 904 | * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation |
||
| 905 | * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then |
||
| 906 | * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments. |
||
| 907 | * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation |
||
| 908 | * unit using this routine. |
||
| 909 | * |
||
| 910 | * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The |
||
| 911 | * translation unit must originally have been built with |
||
| 912 | * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(). |
||
| 913 | * |
||
| 914 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
| 915 | * unsaved_files. |
||
| 916 | * |
||
| 917 | * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
| 918 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
||
| 919 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
||
| 920 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
||
| 921 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
||
| 922 | * |
||
| 923 | * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags. |
||
| 924 | * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of |
||
| 925 | * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit. |
||
| 926 | * |
||
| 927 | * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be |
||
| 928 | * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is |
||
| 929 | * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is |
||
| 930 | * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this |
||
| 931 | * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum. |
||
| 932 | */ |
||
| 933 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int |
||
| 934 | clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
||
| 935 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
| 936 | unsigned options); |
||
| 937 | |||
| 938 | /** |
||
| 939 | * Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit. |
||
| 940 | */ |
||
| 941 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind { |
||
| 942 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1, |
||
| 943 | CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2, |
||
| 944 | CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3, |
||
| 945 | CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4, |
||
| 946 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5, |
||
| 947 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6, |
||
| 948 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7, |
||
| 949 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8, |
||
| 950 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9, |
||
| 951 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10, |
||
| 952 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11, |
||
| 953 | CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12, |
||
| 954 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13, |
||
| 955 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14, |
||
| 956 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
||
| 957 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END = |
||
| 958 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch, |
||
| 959 | |||
| 960 | CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
||
| 961 | CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch |
||
| 962 | }; |
||
| 963 | |||
| 964 | /** |
||
| 965 | * Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents |
||
| 966 | * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed. |
||
| 967 | */ |
||
| 968 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 969 | const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind); |
||
| 970 | |||
| 971 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry { |
||
| 972 | /* The memory usage category. */ |
||
| 973 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind; |
||
| 974 | /* Amount of resources used. |
||
| 975 | The units will depend on the resource kind. */ |
||
| 976 | unsigned long amount; |
||
| 977 | } CXTUResourceUsageEntry; |
||
| 978 | |||
| 979 | /** |
||
| 980 | * The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories. |
||
| 981 | */ |
||
| 982 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage { |
||
| 983 | /* Private data member, used for queries. */ |
||
| 984 | void *data; |
||
| 985 | |||
| 986 | /* The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */ |
||
| 987 | unsigned numEntries; |
||
| 988 | |||
| 989 | /* An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory |
||
| 990 | usage. */ |
||
| 991 | CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries; |
||
| 992 | |||
| 993 | } CXTUResourceUsage; |
||
| 994 | |||
| 995 | /** |
||
| 996 | * Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object |
||
| 997 | * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(). |
||
| 998 | */ |
||
| 999 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage |
||
| 1000 | clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
||
| 1001 | |||
| 1002 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage); |
||
| 1003 | |||
| 1004 | /** |
||
| 1005 | * Get target information for this translation unit. |
||
| 1006 | * |
||
| 1007 | * The CXTargetInfo object cannot outlive the CXTranslationUnit object. |
||
| 1008 | */ |
||
| 1009 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTargetInfo |
||
| 1010 | clang_getTranslationUnitTargetInfo(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
||
| 1011 | |||
| 1012 | /** |
||
| 1013 | * Destroy the CXTargetInfo object. |
||
| 1014 | */ |
||
| 1015 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_TargetInfo_dispose(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
| 1016 | |||
| 1017 | /** |
||
| 1018 | * Get the normalized target triple as a string. |
||
| 1019 | * |
||
| 1020 | * Returns the empty string in case of any error. |
||
| 1021 | */ |
||
| 1022 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_TargetInfo_getTriple(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
| 1023 | |||
| 1024 | /** |
||
| 1025 | * Get the pointer width of the target in bits. |
||
| 1026 | * |
||
| 1027 | * Returns -1 in case of error. |
||
| 1028 | */ |
||
| 1029 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_TargetInfo_getPointerWidth(CXTargetInfo Info); |
||
| 1030 | |||
| 1031 | /** |
||
| 1032 | * @} |
||
| 1033 | */ |
||
| 1034 | |||
| 1035 | /** |
||
| 1036 | * Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to. |
||
| 1037 | */ |
||
| 1038 | enum CXCursorKind { |
||
| 1039 | /* Declarations */ |
||
| 1040 | /** |
||
| 1041 | * A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
| 1042 | * interface. |
||
| 1043 | * |
||
| 1044 | * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind |
||
| 1045 | * of declaration; one can extract their location information, |
||
| 1046 | * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind |
||
| 1047 | * of the declaration is not reported. |
||
| 1048 | */ |
||
| 1049 | CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1, |
||
| 1050 | /** A C or C++ struct. */ |
||
| 1051 | CXCursor_StructDecl = 2, |
||
| 1052 | /** A C or C++ union. */ |
||
| 1053 | CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3, |
||
| 1054 | /** A C++ class. */ |
||
| 1055 | CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4, |
||
| 1056 | /** An enumeration. */ |
||
| 1057 | CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5, |
||
| 1058 | /** |
||
| 1059 | * A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a |
||
| 1060 | * struct, union, or C++ class. |
||
| 1061 | */ |
||
| 1062 | CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6, |
||
| 1063 | /** An enumerator constant. */ |
||
| 1064 | CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7, |
||
| 1065 | /** A function. */ |
||
| 1066 | CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8, |
||
| 1067 | /** A variable. */ |
||
| 1068 | CXCursor_VarDecl = 9, |
||
| 1069 | /** A function or method parameter. */ |
||
| 1070 | CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10, |
||
| 1071 | /** An Objective-C \@interface. */ |
||
| 1072 | CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11, |
||
| 1073 | /** An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */ |
||
| 1074 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12, |
||
| 1075 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */ |
||
| 1076 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13, |
||
| 1077 | /** An Objective-C \@property declaration. */ |
||
| 1078 | CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14, |
||
| 1079 | /** An Objective-C instance variable. */ |
||
| 1080 | CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15, |
||
| 1081 | /** An Objective-C instance method. */ |
||
| 1082 | CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16, |
||
| 1083 | /** An Objective-C class method. */ |
||
| 1084 | CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17, |
||
| 1085 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation. */ |
||
| 1086 | CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18, |
||
| 1087 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */ |
||
| 1088 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19, |
||
| 1089 | /** A typedef. */ |
||
| 1090 | CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20, |
||
| 1091 | /** A C++ class method. */ |
||
| 1092 | CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21, |
||
| 1093 | /** A C++ namespace. */ |
||
| 1094 | CXCursor_Namespace = 22, |
||
| 1095 | /** A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */ |
||
| 1096 | CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23, |
||
| 1097 | /** A C++ constructor. */ |
||
| 1098 | CXCursor_Constructor = 24, |
||
| 1099 | /** A C++ destructor. */ |
||
| 1100 | CXCursor_Destructor = 25, |
||
| 1101 | /** A C++ conversion function. */ |
||
| 1102 | CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26, |
||
| 1103 | /** A C++ template type parameter. */ |
||
| 1104 | CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27, |
||
| 1105 | /** A C++ non-type template parameter. */ |
||
| 1106 | CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28, |
||
| 1107 | /** A C++ template template parameter. */ |
||
| 1108 | CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29, |
||
| 1109 | /** A C++ function template. */ |
||
| 1110 | CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30, |
||
| 1111 | /** A C++ class template. */ |
||
| 1112 | CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31, |
||
| 1113 | /** A C++ class template partial specialization. */ |
||
| 1114 | CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32, |
||
| 1115 | /** A C++ namespace alias declaration. */ |
||
| 1116 | CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33, |
||
| 1117 | /** A C++ using directive. */ |
||
| 1118 | CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34, |
||
| 1119 | /** A C++ using declaration. */ |
||
| 1120 | CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35, |
||
| 1121 | /** A C++ alias declaration */ |
||
| 1122 | CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36, |
||
| 1123 | /** An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */ |
||
| 1124 | CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37, |
||
| 1125 | /** An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */ |
||
| 1126 | CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38, |
||
| 1127 | /** An access specifier. */ |
||
| 1128 | CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39, |
||
| 1129 | |||
| 1130 | CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl, |
||
| 1131 | CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier, |
||
| 1132 | |||
| 1133 | /* References */ |
||
| 1134 | CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */ |
||
| 1135 | CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40, |
||
| 1136 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41, |
||
| 1137 | CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42, |
||
| 1138 | /** |
||
| 1139 | * A reference to a type declaration. |
||
| 1140 | * |
||
| 1141 | * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not |
||
| 1142 | * declared. For example, given: |
||
| 1143 | * |
||
| 1144 | * \code |
||
| 1145 | * typedef unsigned size_type; |
||
| 1146 | * size_type size; |
||
| 1147 | * \endcode |
||
| 1148 | * |
||
| 1149 | * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl), |
||
| 1150 | * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor |
||
| 1151 | * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type. |
||
| 1152 | */ |
||
| 1153 | CXCursor_TypeRef = 43, |
||
| 1154 | CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44, |
||
| 1155 | /** |
||
| 1156 | * A reference to a class template, function template, template |
||
| 1157 | * template parameter, or class template partial specialization. |
||
| 1158 | */ |
||
| 1159 | CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45, |
||
| 1160 | /** |
||
| 1161 | * A reference to a namespace or namespace alias. |
||
| 1162 | */ |
||
| 1163 | CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46, |
||
| 1164 | /** |
||
| 1165 | * A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in |
||
| 1166 | * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer. |
||
| 1167 | */ |
||
| 1168 | CXCursor_MemberRef = 47, |
||
| 1169 | /** |
||
| 1170 | * A reference to a labeled statement. |
||
| 1171 | * |
||
| 1172 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the |
||
| 1173 | * goto statement in the following example: |
||
| 1174 | * |
||
| 1175 | * \code |
||
| 1176 | * start_over: |
||
| 1177 | * ++counter; |
||
| 1178 | * |
||
| 1179 | * goto start_over; |
||
| 1180 | * \endcode |
||
| 1181 | * |
||
| 1182 | * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement. |
||
| 1183 | */ |
||
| 1184 | CXCursor_LabelRef = 48, |
||
| 1185 | |||
| 1186 | /** |
||
| 1187 | * A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates |
||
| 1188 | * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template. |
||
| 1189 | * |
||
| 1190 | * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where |
||
| 1191 | * a dependent name refers to a function. For example: |
||
| 1192 | * |
||
| 1193 | * \code |
||
| 1194 | * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&); |
||
| 1195 | * |
||
| 1196 | * struct X { ... }; |
||
| 1197 | * void swap(X&, X&); |
||
| 1198 | * |
||
| 1199 | * template<typename T> |
||
| 1200 | * void reverse(T* first, T* last) { |
||
| 1201 | * while (first < last - 1) { |
||
| 1202 | * swap(*first, *--last); |
||
| 1203 | * ++first; |
||
| 1204 | * } |
||
| 1205 | * } |
||
| 1206 | * |
||
| 1207 | * struct Y { }; |
||
| 1208 | * void swap(Y&, Y&); |
||
| 1209 | * \endcode |
||
| 1210 | * |
||
| 1211 | * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration |
||
| 1212 | * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two |
||
| 1213 | * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At |
||
| 1214 | * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via |
||
| 1215 | * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the |
||
| 1216 | * example). |
||
| 1217 | * |
||
| 1218 | * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and |
||
| 1219 | * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions |
||
| 1220 | * referenced by this cursor. |
||
| 1221 | */ |
||
| 1222 | CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49, |
||
| 1223 | |||
| 1224 | /** |
||
| 1225 | * A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression |
||
| 1226 | * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list. |
||
| 1227 | */ |
||
| 1228 | CXCursor_VariableRef = 50, |
||
| 1229 | |||
| 1230 | CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef, |
||
| 1231 | |||
| 1232 | /* Error conditions */ |
||
| 1233 | CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70, |
||
| 1234 | CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70, |
||
| 1235 | CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71, |
||
| 1236 | CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72, |
||
| 1237 | CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73, |
||
| 1238 | CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode, |
||
| 1239 | |||
| 1240 | /* Expressions */ |
||
| 1241 | CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100, |
||
| 1242 | |||
| 1243 | /** |
||
| 1244 | * An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
| 1245 | * interface. |
||
| 1246 | * |
||
| 1247 | * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind |
||
| 1248 | * of expression; one can extract their location information, |
||
| 1249 | * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the |
||
| 1250 | * expression is not reported. |
||
| 1251 | */ |
||
| 1252 | CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100, |
||
| 1253 | |||
| 1254 | /** |
||
| 1255 | * An expression that refers to some value declaration, such |
||
| 1256 | * as a function, variable, or enumerator. |
||
| 1257 | */ |
||
| 1258 | CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101, |
||
| 1259 | |||
| 1260 | /** |
||
| 1261 | * An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union, |
||
| 1262 | * class, Objective-C class, etc. |
||
| 1263 | */ |
||
| 1264 | CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102, |
||
| 1265 | |||
| 1266 | /** An expression that calls a function. */ |
||
| 1267 | CXCursor_CallExpr = 103, |
||
| 1268 | |||
| 1269 | /** An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C |
||
| 1270 | object or class. */ |
||
| 1271 | CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104, |
||
| 1272 | |||
| 1273 | /** An expression that represents a block literal. */ |
||
| 1274 | CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105, |
||
| 1275 | |||
| 1276 | /** An integer literal. |
||
| 1277 | */ |
||
| 1278 | CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106, |
||
| 1279 | |||
| 1280 | /** A floating point number literal. |
||
| 1281 | */ |
||
| 1282 | CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107, |
||
| 1283 | |||
| 1284 | /** An imaginary number literal. |
||
| 1285 | */ |
||
| 1286 | CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108, |
||
| 1287 | |||
| 1288 | /** A string literal. |
||
| 1289 | */ |
||
| 1290 | CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109, |
||
| 1291 | |||
| 1292 | /** A character literal. |
||
| 1293 | */ |
||
| 1294 | CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110, |
||
| 1295 | |||
| 1296 | /** A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)". |
||
| 1297 | * |
||
| 1298 | * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested. |
||
| 1299 | */ |
||
| 1300 | CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111, |
||
| 1301 | |||
| 1302 | /** This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and |
||
| 1303 | * alignof). |
||
| 1304 | */ |
||
| 1305 | CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112, |
||
| 1306 | |||
| 1307 | /** [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting. |
||
| 1308 | */ |
||
| 1309 | CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113, |
||
| 1310 | |||
| 1311 | /** A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or |
||
| 1312 | * "x <= y". |
||
| 1313 | */ |
||
| 1314 | CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114, |
||
| 1315 | |||
| 1316 | /** Compound assignment such as "+=". |
||
| 1317 | */ |
||
| 1318 | CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115, |
||
| 1319 | |||
| 1320 | /** The ?: ternary operator. |
||
| 1321 | */ |
||
| 1322 | CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116, |
||
| 1323 | |||
| 1324 | /** An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++ |
||
| 1325 | * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr. |
||
| 1326 | * |
||
| 1327 | * For example: (int)f. |
||
| 1328 | */ |
||
| 1329 | CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117, |
||
| 1330 | |||
| 1331 | /** [C99 6.5.2.5] |
||
| 1332 | */ |
||
| 1333 | CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118, |
||
| 1334 | |||
| 1335 | /** Describes an C or C++ initializer list. |
||
| 1336 | */ |
||
| 1337 | CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119, |
||
| 1338 | |||
| 1339 | /** The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label. |
||
| 1340 | */ |
||
| 1341 | CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120, |
||
| 1342 | |||
| 1343 | /** This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;}) |
||
| 1344 | */ |
||
| 1345 | CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121, |
||
| 1346 | |||
| 1347 | /** Represents a C11 generic selection. |
||
| 1348 | */ |
||
| 1349 | CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122, |
||
| 1350 | |||
| 1351 | /** Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null |
||
| 1352 | * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same |
||
| 1353 | * size and alignment as a pointer. |
||
| 1354 | * |
||
| 1355 | * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define |
||
| 1356 | * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not |
||
| 1357 | * match the size of a pointer). |
||
| 1358 | */ |
||
| 1359 | CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123, |
||
| 1360 | |||
| 1361 | /** C++'s static_cast<> expression. |
||
| 1362 | */ |
||
| 1363 | CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124, |
||
| 1364 | |||
| 1365 | /** C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression. |
||
| 1366 | */ |
||
| 1367 | CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125, |
||
| 1368 | |||
| 1369 | /** C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression. |
||
| 1370 | */ |
||
| 1371 | CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126, |
||
| 1372 | |||
| 1373 | /** C++'s const_cast<> expression. |
||
| 1374 | */ |
||
| 1375 | CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127, |
||
| 1376 | |||
| 1377 | /** Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional" |
||
| 1378 | * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]). |
||
| 1379 | * |
||
| 1380 | * Example: |
||
| 1381 | * \code |
||
| 1382 | * x = int(0.5); |
||
| 1383 | * \endcode |
||
| 1384 | */ |
||
| 1385 | CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128, |
||
| 1386 | |||
| 1387 | /** A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]). |
||
| 1388 | */ |
||
| 1389 | CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129, |
||
| 1390 | |||
| 1391 | /** [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal. |
||
| 1392 | */ |
||
| 1393 | CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130, |
||
| 1394 | |||
| 1395 | /** [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal. |
||
| 1396 | */ |
||
| 1397 | CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131, |
||
| 1398 | |||
| 1399 | /** Represents the "this" expression in C++ |
||
| 1400 | */ |
||
| 1401 | CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132, |
||
| 1402 | |||
| 1403 | /** [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression. |
||
| 1404 | * |
||
| 1405 | * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When |
||
| 1406 | * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null. |
||
| 1407 | */ |
||
| 1408 | CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133, |
||
| 1409 | |||
| 1410 | /** A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g: |
||
| 1411 | * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)". |
||
| 1412 | */ |
||
| 1413 | CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134, |
||
| 1414 | |||
| 1415 | /** A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls, |
||
| 1416 | * e.g. "delete[] pArray". |
||
| 1417 | */ |
||
| 1418 | CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135, |
||
| 1419 | |||
| 1420 | /** A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits) |
||
| 1421 | */ |
||
| 1422 | CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136, |
||
| 1423 | |||
| 1424 | /** An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo". |
||
| 1425 | */ |
||
| 1426 | CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137, |
||
| 1427 | |||
| 1428 | /** An Objective-C \@encode expression. |
||
| 1429 | */ |
||
| 1430 | CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138, |
||
| 1431 | |||
| 1432 | /** An Objective-C \@selector expression. |
||
| 1433 | */ |
||
| 1434 | CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139, |
||
| 1435 | |||
| 1436 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol expression. |
||
| 1437 | */ |
||
| 1438 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140, |
||
| 1439 | |||
| 1440 | /** An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between |
||
| 1441 | * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process. |
||
| 1442 | * |
||
| 1443 | * \code |
||
| 1444 | * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString(); |
||
| 1445 | * \endcode |
||
| 1446 | */ |
||
| 1447 | CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141, |
||
| 1448 | |||
| 1449 | /** Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of |
||
| 1450 | * expressions. |
||
| 1451 | * |
||
| 1452 | * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an |
||
| 1453 | * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example: |
||
| 1454 | * |
||
| 1455 | * \code |
||
| 1456 | * template<typename F, typename ...Types> |
||
| 1457 | * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) { |
||
| 1458 | * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...); |
||
| 1459 | * } |
||
| 1460 | * \endcode |
||
| 1461 | */ |
||
| 1462 | CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142, |
||
| 1463 | |||
| 1464 | /** Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter |
||
| 1465 | * pack. |
||
| 1466 | * |
||
| 1467 | * \code |
||
| 1468 | * template<typename ...Types> |
||
| 1469 | * struct count { |
||
| 1470 | * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types); |
||
| 1471 | * }; |
||
| 1472 | * \endcode |
||
| 1473 | */ |
||
| 1474 | CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143, |
||
| 1475 | |||
| 1476 | /* Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function |
||
| 1477 | * object. |
||
| 1478 | * |
||
| 1479 | * \code |
||
| 1480 | * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) { |
||
| 1481 | * std::sort(x, x + N, |
||
| 1482 | * [](float a, float b) { |
||
| 1483 | * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b); |
||
| 1484 | * }); |
||
| 1485 | * } |
||
| 1486 | * \endcode |
||
| 1487 | */ |
||
| 1488 | CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144, |
||
| 1489 | |||
| 1490 | /** Objective-c Boolean Literal. |
||
| 1491 | */ |
||
| 1492 | CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145, |
||
| 1493 | |||
| 1494 | /** Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method. |
||
| 1495 | */ |
||
| 1496 | CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146, |
||
| 1497 | |||
| 1498 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.5, Array Section]. |
||
| 1499 | */ |
||
| 1500 | CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147, |
||
| 1501 | |||
| 1502 | /** Represents an @available(...) check. |
||
| 1503 | */ |
||
| 1504 | CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148, |
||
| 1505 | |||
| 1506 | /** |
||
| 1507 | * Fixed point literal |
||
| 1508 | */ |
||
| 1509 | CXCursor_FixedPointLiteral = 149, |
||
| 1510 | |||
| 1511 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.4, Array Shaping]. |
||
| 1512 | */ |
||
| 1513 | CXCursor_OMPArrayShapingExpr = 150, |
||
| 1514 | |||
| 1515 | /** |
||
| 1516 | * OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.6 Iterators] |
||
| 1517 | */ |
||
| 1518 | CXCursor_OMPIteratorExpr = 151, |
||
| 1519 | |||
| 1520 | /** OpenCL's addrspace_cast<> expression. |
||
| 1521 | */ |
||
| 1522 | CXCursor_CXXAddrspaceCastExpr = 152, |
||
| 1523 | |||
| 1524 | /** |
||
| 1525 | * Expression that references a C++20 concept. |
||
| 1526 | */ |
||
| 1527 | CXCursor_ConceptSpecializationExpr = 153, |
||
| 1528 | |||
| 1529 | /** |
||
| 1530 | * Expression that references a C++20 concept. |
||
| 1531 | */ |
||
| 1532 | CXCursor_RequiresExpr = 154, |
||
| 1533 | |||
| 1534 | /** |
||
| 1535 | * Expression that references a C++20 parenthesized list aggregate |
||
| 1536 | * initializer. |
||
| 1537 | */ |
||
| 1538 | CXCursor_CXXParenListInitExpr = 155, |
||
| 1539 | |||
| 1540 | CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_CXXParenListInitExpr, |
||
| 1541 | |||
| 1542 | /* Statements */ |
||
| 1543 | CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200, |
||
| 1544 | /** |
||
| 1545 | * A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
| 1546 | * interface. |
||
| 1547 | * |
||
| 1548 | * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of |
||
| 1549 | * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling, |
||
| 1550 | * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not |
||
| 1551 | * reported. |
||
| 1552 | */ |
||
| 1553 | CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200, |
||
| 1554 | |||
| 1555 | /** A labelled statement in a function. |
||
| 1556 | * |
||
| 1557 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in |
||
| 1558 | * the following example: |
||
| 1559 | * |
||
| 1560 | * \code |
||
| 1561 | * start_over: |
||
| 1562 | * ++counter; |
||
| 1563 | * \endcode |
||
| 1564 | * |
||
| 1565 | */ |
||
| 1566 | CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201, |
||
| 1567 | |||
| 1568 | /** A group of statements like { stmt stmt }. |
||
| 1569 | * |
||
| 1570 | * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function |
||
| 1571 | * bodies. |
||
| 1572 | */ |
||
| 1573 | CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202, |
||
| 1574 | |||
| 1575 | /** A case statement. |
||
| 1576 | */ |
||
| 1577 | CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203, |
||
| 1578 | |||
| 1579 | /** A default statement. |
||
| 1580 | */ |
||
| 1581 | CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204, |
||
| 1582 | |||
| 1583 | /** An if statement |
||
| 1584 | */ |
||
| 1585 | CXCursor_IfStmt = 205, |
||
| 1586 | |||
| 1587 | /** A switch statement. |
||
| 1588 | */ |
||
| 1589 | CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206, |
||
| 1590 | |||
| 1591 | /** A while statement. |
||
| 1592 | */ |
||
| 1593 | CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207, |
||
| 1594 | |||
| 1595 | /** A do statement. |
||
| 1596 | */ |
||
| 1597 | CXCursor_DoStmt = 208, |
||
| 1598 | |||
| 1599 | /** A for statement. |
||
| 1600 | */ |
||
| 1601 | CXCursor_ForStmt = 209, |
||
| 1602 | |||
| 1603 | /** A goto statement. |
||
| 1604 | */ |
||
| 1605 | CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210, |
||
| 1606 | |||
| 1607 | /** An indirect goto statement. |
||
| 1608 | */ |
||
| 1609 | CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211, |
||
| 1610 | |||
| 1611 | /** A continue statement. |
||
| 1612 | */ |
||
| 1613 | CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212, |
||
| 1614 | |||
| 1615 | /** A break statement. |
||
| 1616 | */ |
||
| 1617 | CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213, |
||
| 1618 | |||
| 1619 | /** A return statement. |
||
| 1620 | */ |
||
| 1621 | CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214, |
||
| 1622 | |||
| 1623 | /** A GCC inline assembly statement extension. |
||
| 1624 | */ |
||
| 1625 | CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215, |
||
| 1626 | CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt, |
||
| 1627 | |||
| 1628 | /** Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement. |
||
| 1629 | */ |
||
| 1630 | CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216, |
||
| 1631 | |||
| 1632 | /** Objective-C's \@catch statement. |
||
| 1633 | */ |
||
| 1634 | CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217, |
||
| 1635 | |||
| 1636 | /** Objective-C's \@finally statement. |
||
| 1637 | */ |
||
| 1638 | CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218, |
||
| 1639 | |||
| 1640 | /** Objective-C's \@throw statement. |
||
| 1641 | */ |
||
| 1642 | CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219, |
||
| 1643 | |||
| 1644 | /** Objective-C's \@synchronized statement. |
||
| 1645 | */ |
||
| 1646 | CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220, |
||
| 1647 | |||
| 1648 | /** Objective-C's autorelease pool statement. |
||
| 1649 | */ |
||
| 1650 | CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221, |
||
| 1651 | |||
| 1652 | /** Objective-C's collection statement. |
||
| 1653 | */ |
||
| 1654 | CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222, |
||
| 1655 | |||
| 1656 | /** C++'s catch statement. |
||
| 1657 | */ |
||
| 1658 | CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223, |
||
| 1659 | |||
| 1660 | /** C++'s try statement. |
||
| 1661 | */ |
||
| 1662 | CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224, |
||
| 1663 | |||
| 1664 | /** C++'s for (* : *) statement. |
||
| 1665 | */ |
||
| 1666 | CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225, |
||
| 1667 | |||
| 1668 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement. |
||
| 1669 | */ |
||
| 1670 | CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226, |
||
| 1671 | |||
| 1672 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement. |
||
| 1673 | */ |
||
| 1674 | CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227, |
||
| 1675 | |||
| 1676 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement. |
||
| 1677 | */ |
||
| 1678 | CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228, |
||
| 1679 | |||
| 1680 | /** A MS inline assembly statement extension. |
||
| 1681 | */ |
||
| 1682 | CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229, |
||
| 1683 | |||
| 1684 | /** The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3. |
||
| 1685 | * |
||
| 1686 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement. |
||
| 1687 | */ |
||
| 1688 | CXCursor_NullStmt = 230, |
||
| 1689 | |||
| 1690 | /** Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and |
||
| 1691 | * expressions. |
||
| 1692 | */ |
||
| 1693 | CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231, |
||
| 1694 | |||
| 1695 | /** OpenMP parallel directive. |
||
| 1696 | */ |
||
| 1697 | CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232, |
||
| 1698 | |||
| 1699 | /** OpenMP SIMD directive. |
||
| 1700 | */ |
||
| 1701 | CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233, |
||
| 1702 | |||
| 1703 | /** OpenMP for directive. |
||
| 1704 | */ |
||
| 1705 | CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234, |
||
| 1706 | |||
| 1707 | /** OpenMP sections directive. |
||
| 1708 | */ |
||
| 1709 | CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235, |
||
| 1710 | |||
| 1711 | /** OpenMP section directive. |
||
| 1712 | */ |
||
| 1713 | CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236, |
||
| 1714 | |||
| 1715 | /** OpenMP single directive. |
||
| 1716 | */ |
||
| 1717 | CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237, |
||
| 1718 | |||
| 1719 | /** OpenMP parallel for directive. |
||
| 1720 | */ |
||
| 1721 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238, |
||
| 1722 | |||
| 1723 | /** OpenMP parallel sections directive. |
||
| 1724 | */ |
||
| 1725 | CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239, |
||
| 1726 | |||
| 1727 | /** OpenMP task directive. |
||
| 1728 | */ |
||
| 1729 | CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240, |
||
| 1730 | |||
| 1731 | /** OpenMP master directive. |
||
| 1732 | */ |
||
| 1733 | CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241, |
||
| 1734 | |||
| 1735 | /** OpenMP critical directive. |
||
| 1736 | */ |
||
| 1737 | CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242, |
||
| 1738 | |||
| 1739 | /** OpenMP taskyield directive. |
||
| 1740 | */ |
||
| 1741 | CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243, |
||
| 1742 | |||
| 1743 | /** OpenMP barrier directive. |
||
| 1744 | */ |
||
| 1745 | CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244, |
||
| 1746 | |||
| 1747 | /** OpenMP taskwait directive. |
||
| 1748 | */ |
||
| 1749 | CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245, |
||
| 1750 | |||
| 1751 | /** OpenMP flush directive. |
||
| 1752 | */ |
||
| 1753 | CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246, |
||
| 1754 | |||
| 1755 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement. |
||
| 1756 | */ |
||
| 1757 | CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247, |
||
| 1758 | |||
| 1759 | /** OpenMP ordered directive. |
||
| 1760 | */ |
||
| 1761 | CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248, |
||
| 1762 | |||
| 1763 | /** OpenMP atomic directive. |
||
| 1764 | */ |
||
| 1765 | CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249, |
||
| 1766 | |||
| 1767 | /** OpenMP for SIMD directive. |
||
| 1768 | */ |
||
| 1769 | CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250, |
||
| 1770 | |||
| 1771 | /** OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive. |
||
| 1772 | */ |
||
| 1773 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251, |
||
| 1774 | |||
| 1775 | /** OpenMP target directive. |
||
| 1776 | */ |
||
| 1777 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252, |
||
| 1778 | |||
| 1779 | /** OpenMP teams directive. |
||
| 1780 | */ |
||
| 1781 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253, |
||
| 1782 | |||
| 1783 | /** OpenMP taskgroup directive. |
||
| 1784 | */ |
||
| 1785 | CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254, |
||
| 1786 | |||
| 1787 | /** OpenMP cancellation point directive. |
||
| 1788 | */ |
||
| 1789 | CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255, |
||
| 1790 | |||
| 1791 | /** OpenMP cancel directive. |
||
| 1792 | */ |
||
| 1793 | CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256, |
||
| 1794 | |||
| 1795 | /** OpenMP target data directive. |
||
| 1796 | */ |
||
| 1797 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257, |
||
| 1798 | |||
| 1799 | /** OpenMP taskloop directive. |
||
| 1800 | */ |
||
| 1801 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258, |
||
| 1802 | |||
| 1803 | /** OpenMP taskloop simd directive. |
||
| 1804 | */ |
||
| 1805 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259, |
||
| 1806 | |||
| 1807 | /** OpenMP distribute directive. |
||
| 1808 | */ |
||
| 1809 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260, |
||
| 1810 | |||
| 1811 | /** OpenMP target enter data directive. |
||
| 1812 | */ |
||
| 1813 | CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261, |
||
| 1814 | |||
| 1815 | /** OpenMP target exit data directive. |
||
| 1816 | */ |
||
| 1817 | CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262, |
||
| 1818 | |||
| 1819 | /** OpenMP target parallel directive. |
||
| 1820 | */ |
||
| 1821 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263, |
||
| 1822 | |||
| 1823 | /** OpenMP target parallel for directive. |
||
| 1824 | */ |
||
| 1825 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264, |
||
| 1826 | |||
| 1827 | /** OpenMP target update directive. |
||
| 1828 | */ |
||
| 1829 | CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265, |
||
| 1830 | |||
| 1831 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for directive. |
||
| 1832 | */ |
||
| 1833 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266, |
||
| 1834 | |||
| 1835 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
| 1836 | */ |
||
| 1837 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267, |
||
| 1838 | |||
| 1839 | /** OpenMP distribute simd directive. |
||
| 1840 | */ |
||
| 1841 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268, |
||
| 1842 | |||
| 1843 | /** OpenMP target parallel for simd directive. |
||
| 1844 | */ |
||
| 1845 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269, |
||
| 1846 | |||
| 1847 | /** OpenMP target simd directive. |
||
| 1848 | */ |
||
| 1849 | CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270, |
||
| 1850 | |||
| 1851 | /** OpenMP teams distribute directive. |
||
| 1852 | */ |
||
| 1853 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271, |
||
| 1854 | |||
| 1855 | /** OpenMP teams distribute simd directive. |
||
| 1856 | */ |
||
| 1857 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272, |
||
| 1858 | |||
| 1859 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
| 1860 | */ |
||
| 1861 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273, |
||
| 1862 | |||
| 1863 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive. |
||
| 1864 | */ |
||
| 1865 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274, |
||
| 1866 | |||
| 1867 | /** OpenMP target teams directive. |
||
| 1868 | */ |
||
| 1869 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDirective = 275, |
||
| 1870 | |||
| 1871 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute directive. |
||
| 1872 | */ |
||
| 1873 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeDirective = 276, |
||
| 1874 | |||
| 1875 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for directive. |
||
| 1876 | */ |
||
| 1877 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 277, |
||
| 1878 | |||
| 1879 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
||
| 1880 | */ |
||
| 1881 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 278, |
||
| 1882 | |||
| 1883 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute simd directive. |
||
| 1884 | */ |
||
| 1885 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 279, |
||
| 1886 | |||
| 1887 | /** C++2a std::bit_cast expression. |
||
| 1888 | */ |
||
| 1889 | CXCursor_BuiltinBitCastExpr = 280, |
||
| 1890 | |||
| 1891 | /** OpenMP master taskloop directive. |
||
| 1892 | */ |
||
| 1893 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopDirective = 281, |
||
| 1894 | |||
| 1895 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop directive. |
||
| 1896 | */ |
||
| 1897 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopDirective = 282, |
||
| 1898 | |||
| 1899 | /** OpenMP master taskloop simd directive. |
||
| 1900 | */ |
||
| 1901 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 283, |
||
| 1902 | |||
| 1903 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop simd directive. |
||
| 1904 | */ |
||
| 1905 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 284, |
||
| 1906 | |||
| 1907 | /** OpenMP parallel master directive. |
||
| 1908 | */ |
||
| 1909 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterDirective = 285, |
||
| 1910 | |||
| 1911 | /** OpenMP depobj directive. |
||
| 1912 | */ |
||
| 1913 | CXCursor_OMPDepobjDirective = 286, |
||
| 1914 | |||
| 1915 | /** OpenMP scan directive. |
||
| 1916 | */ |
||
| 1917 | CXCursor_OMPScanDirective = 287, |
||
| 1918 | |||
| 1919 | /** OpenMP tile directive. |
||
| 1920 | */ |
||
| 1921 | CXCursor_OMPTileDirective = 288, |
||
| 1922 | |||
| 1923 | /** OpenMP canonical loop. |
||
| 1924 | */ |
||
| 1925 | CXCursor_OMPCanonicalLoop = 289, |
||
| 1926 | |||
| 1927 | /** OpenMP interop directive. |
||
| 1928 | */ |
||
| 1929 | CXCursor_OMPInteropDirective = 290, |
||
| 1930 | |||
| 1931 | /** OpenMP dispatch directive. |
||
| 1932 | */ |
||
| 1933 | CXCursor_OMPDispatchDirective = 291, |
||
| 1934 | |||
| 1935 | /** OpenMP masked directive. |
||
| 1936 | */ |
||
| 1937 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedDirective = 292, |
||
| 1938 | |||
| 1939 | /** OpenMP unroll directive. |
||
| 1940 | */ |
||
| 1941 | CXCursor_OMPUnrollDirective = 293, |
||
| 1942 | |||
| 1943 | /** OpenMP metadirective directive. |
||
| 1944 | */ |
||
| 1945 | CXCursor_OMPMetaDirective = 294, |
||
| 1946 | |||
| 1947 | /** OpenMP loop directive. |
||
| 1948 | */ |
||
| 1949 | CXCursor_OMPGenericLoopDirective = 295, |
||
| 1950 | |||
| 1951 | /** OpenMP teams loop directive. |
||
| 1952 | */ |
||
| 1953 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 296, |
||
| 1954 | |||
| 1955 | /** OpenMP target teams loop directive. |
||
| 1956 | */ |
||
| 1957 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 297, |
||
| 1958 | |||
| 1959 | /** OpenMP parallel loop directive. |
||
| 1960 | */ |
||
| 1961 | CXCursor_OMPParallelGenericLoopDirective = 298, |
||
| 1962 | |||
| 1963 | /** OpenMP target parallel loop directive. |
||
| 1964 | */ |
||
| 1965 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelGenericLoopDirective = 299, |
||
| 1966 | |||
| 1967 | /** OpenMP parallel masked directive. |
||
| 1968 | */ |
||
| 1969 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedDirective = 300, |
||
| 1970 | |||
| 1971 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop directive. |
||
| 1972 | */ |
||
| 1973 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 301, |
||
| 1974 | |||
| 1975 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop simd directive. |
||
| 1976 | */ |
||
| 1977 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 302, |
||
| 1978 | |||
| 1979 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop directive. |
||
| 1980 | */ |
||
| 1981 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 303, |
||
| 1982 | |||
| 1983 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop simd directive. |
||
| 1984 | */ |
||
| 1985 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 304, |
||
| 1986 | |||
| 1987 | /** OpenMP error directive. |
||
| 1988 | */ |
||
| 1989 | CXCursor_OMPErrorDirective = 305, |
||
| 1990 | |||
| 1991 | CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPErrorDirective, |
||
| 1992 | |||
| 1993 | /** |
||
| 1994 | * Cursor that represents the translation unit itself. |
||
| 1995 | * |
||
| 1996 | * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root |
||
| 1997 | * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit. |
||
| 1998 | */ |
||
| 1999 | CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 350, |
||
| 2000 | |||
| 2001 | /* Attributes */ |
||
| 2002 | CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400, |
||
| 2003 | /** |
||
| 2004 | * An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
| 2005 | * interface. |
||
| 2006 | */ |
||
| 2007 | CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400, |
||
| 2008 | |||
| 2009 | CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401, |
||
| 2010 | CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402, |
||
| 2011 | CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403, |
||
| 2012 | CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404, |
||
| 2013 | CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405, |
||
| 2014 | CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406, |
||
| 2015 | CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407, |
||
| 2016 | CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408, |
||
| 2017 | CXCursor_PureAttr = 409, |
||
| 2018 | CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410, |
||
| 2019 | CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411, |
||
| 2020 | CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412, |
||
| 2021 | CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413, |
||
| 2022 | CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414, |
||
| 2023 | CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415, |
||
| 2024 | CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416, |
||
| 2025 | CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417, |
||
| 2026 | CXCursor_DLLExport = 418, |
||
| 2027 | CXCursor_DLLImport = 419, |
||
| 2028 | CXCursor_NSReturnsRetained = 420, |
||
| 2029 | CXCursor_NSReturnsNotRetained = 421, |
||
| 2030 | CXCursor_NSReturnsAutoreleased = 422, |
||
| 2031 | CXCursor_NSConsumesSelf = 423, |
||
| 2032 | CXCursor_NSConsumed = 424, |
||
| 2033 | CXCursor_ObjCException = 425, |
||
| 2034 | CXCursor_ObjCNSObject = 426, |
||
| 2035 | CXCursor_ObjCIndependentClass = 427, |
||
| 2036 | CXCursor_ObjCPreciseLifetime = 428, |
||
| 2037 | CXCursor_ObjCReturnsInnerPointer = 429, |
||
| 2038 | CXCursor_ObjCRequiresSuper = 430, |
||
| 2039 | CXCursor_ObjCRootClass = 431, |
||
| 2040 | CXCursor_ObjCSubclassingRestricted = 432, |
||
| 2041 | CXCursor_ObjCExplicitProtocolImpl = 433, |
||
| 2042 | CXCursor_ObjCDesignatedInitializer = 434, |
||
| 2043 | CXCursor_ObjCRuntimeVisible = 435, |
||
| 2044 | CXCursor_ObjCBoxable = 436, |
||
| 2045 | CXCursor_FlagEnum = 437, |
||
| 2046 | CXCursor_ConvergentAttr = 438, |
||
| 2047 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedAttr = 439, |
||
| 2048 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedResultAttr = 440, |
||
| 2049 | CXCursor_AlignedAttr = 441, |
||
| 2050 | CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_AlignedAttr, |
||
| 2051 | |||
| 2052 | /* Preprocessing */ |
||
| 2053 | CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500, |
||
| 2054 | CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501, |
||
| 2055 | CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502, |
||
| 2056 | CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion, |
||
| 2057 | CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503, |
||
| 2058 | CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective, |
||
| 2059 | CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective, |
||
| 2060 | |||
| 2061 | /* Extra Declarations */ |
||
| 2062 | /** |
||
| 2063 | * A module import declaration. |
||
| 2064 | */ |
||
| 2065 | CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600, |
||
| 2066 | CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601, |
||
| 2067 | /** |
||
| 2068 | * A static_assert or _Static_assert node |
||
| 2069 | */ |
||
| 2070 | CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602, |
||
| 2071 | /** |
||
| 2072 | * a friend declaration. |
||
| 2073 | */ |
||
| 2074 | CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603, |
||
| 2075 | /** |
||
| 2076 | * a concept declaration. |
||
| 2077 | */ |
||
| 2078 | CXCursor_ConceptDecl = 604, |
||
| 2079 | |||
| 2080 | CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl, |
||
| 2081 | CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_ConceptDecl, |
||
| 2082 | |||
| 2083 | /** |
||
| 2084 | * A code completion overload candidate. |
||
| 2085 | */ |
||
| 2086 | CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700 |
||
| 2087 | }; |
||
| 2088 | |||
| 2089 | /** |
||
| 2090 | * A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for |
||
| 2091 | * a translation unit. |
||
| 2092 | * |
||
| 2093 | * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a |
||
| 2094 | * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations, |
||
| 2095 | * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations. |
||
| 2096 | * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in |
||
| 2097 | * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a |
||
| 2098 | * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor. |
||
| 2099 | * |
||
| 2100 | * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways. |
||
| 2101 | * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit, |
||
| 2102 | * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the |
||
| 2103 | * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location |
||
| 2104 | * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the |
||
| 2105 | * source code into the AST. |
||
| 2106 | */ |
||
| 2107 | typedef struct { |
||
| 2108 | enum CXCursorKind kind; |
||
| 2109 | int xdata; |
||
| 2110 | const void *data[3]; |
||
| 2111 | } CXCursor; |
||
| 2112 | |||
| 2113 | /** |
||
| 2114 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations |
||
| 2115 | * |
||
| 2116 | * @{ |
||
| 2117 | */ |
||
| 2118 | |||
| 2119 | /** |
||
| 2120 | * Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity. |
||
| 2121 | */ |
||
| 2122 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void); |
||
| 2123 | |||
| 2124 | /** |
||
| 2125 | * Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit. |
||
| 2126 | * |
||
| 2127 | * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the |
||
| 2128 | * various declarations within the given translation unit. |
||
| 2129 | */ |
||
| 2130 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit); |
||
| 2131 | |||
| 2132 | /** |
||
| 2133 | * Determine whether two cursors are equivalent. |
||
| 2134 | */ |
||
| 2135 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor); |
||
| 2136 | |||
| 2137 | /** |
||
| 2138 | * Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null. |
||
| 2139 | */ |
||
| 2140 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2141 | |||
| 2142 | /** |
||
| 2143 | * Compute a hash value for the given cursor. |
||
| 2144 | */ |
||
| 2145 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor); |
||
| 2146 | |||
| 2147 | /** |
||
| 2148 | * Retrieve the kind of the given cursor. |
||
| 2149 | */ |
||
| 2150 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor); |
||
| 2151 | |||
| 2152 | /** |
||
| 2153 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration. |
||
| 2154 | */ |
||
| 2155 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2156 | |||
| 2157 | /** |
||
| 2158 | * Determine whether the given declaration is invalid. |
||
| 2159 | * |
||
| 2160 | * A declaration is invalid if it could not be parsed successfully. |
||
| 2161 | * |
||
| 2162 | * \returns non-zero if the cursor represents a declaration and it is |
||
| 2163 | * invalid, otherwise NULL. |
||
| 2164 | */ |
||
| 2165 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalidDeclaration(CXCursor); |
||
| 2166 | |||
| 2167 | /** |
||
| 2168 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple |
||
| 2169 | * reference. |
||
| 2170 | * |
||
| 2171 | * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to |
||
| 2172 | * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a |
||
| 2173 | * particular cursor refers to another entity. |
||
| 2174 | */ |
||
| 2175 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2176 | |||
| 2177 | /** |
||
| 2178 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression. |
||
| 2179 | */ |
||
| 2180 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2181 | |||
| 2182 | /** |
||
| 2183 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement. |
||
| 2184 | */ |
||
| 2185 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2186 | |||
| 2187 | /** |
||
| 2188 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute. |
||
| 2189 | */ |
||
| 2190 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2191 | |||
| 2192 | /** |
||
| 2193 | * Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes. |
||
| 2194 | */ |
||
| 2195 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2196 | |||
| 2197 | /** |
||
| 2198 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid |
||
| 2199 | * cursor. |
||
| 2200 | */ |
||
| 2201 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2202 | |||
| 2203 | /** |
||
| 2204 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation |
||
| 2205 | * unit. |
||
| 2206 | */ |
||
| 2207 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2208 | |||
| 2209 | /*** |
||
| 2210 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing |
||
| 2211 | * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation. |
||
| 2212 | */ |
||
| 2213 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2214 | |||
| 2215 | /*** |
||
| 2216 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently |
||
| 2217 | * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt). |
||
| 2218 | */ |
||
| 2219 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind); |
||
| 2220 | |||
| 2221 | /** |
||
| 2222 | * Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
| 2223 | */ |
||
| 2224 | enum CXLinkageKind { |
||
| 2225 | /** This value indicates that no linkage information is available |
||
| 2226 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
||
| 2227 | CXLinkage_Invalid, |
||
| 2228 | /** |
||
| 2229 | * This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that |
||
| 2230 | * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables. |
||
| 2231 | */ |
||
| 2232 | CXLinkage_NoLinkage, |
||
| 2233 | /** This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */ |
||
| 2234 | CXLinkage_Internal, |
||
| 2235 | /** This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live |
||
| 2236 | * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/ |
||
| 2237 | CXLinkage_UniqueExternal, |
||
| 2238 | /** This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */ |
||
| 2239 | CXLinkage_External |
||
| 2240 | }; |
||
| 2241 | |||
| 2242 | /** |
||
| 2243 | * Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
||
| 2244 | */ |
||
| 2245 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2246 | |||
| 2247 | enum CXVisibilityKind { |
||
| 2248 | /** This value indicates that no visibility information is available |
||
| 2249 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
||
| 2250 | CXVisibility_Invalid, |
||
| 2251 | |||
| 2252 | /** Symbol not seen by the linker. */ |
||
| 2253 | CXVisibility_Hidden, |
||
| 2254 | /** Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */ |
||
| 2255 | CXVisibility_Protected, |
||
| 2256 | /** Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */ |
||
| 2257 | CXVisibility_Default |
||
| 2258 | }; |
||
| 2259 | |||
| 2260 | /** |
||
| 2261 | * Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
| 2262 | * |
||
| 2263 | * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by |
||
| 2264 | * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by |
||
| 2265 | * commandline arguments. |
||
| 2266 | * |
||
| 2267 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
| 2268 | * |
||
| 2269 | * \returns The visibility of the cursor. |
||
| 2270 | */ |
||
| 2271 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2272 | |||
| 2273 | /** |
||
| 2274 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to, |
||
| 2275 | * taking the current target platform into account. |
||
| 2276 | * |
||
| 2277 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
| 2278 | * |
||
| 2279 | * \returns The availability of the cursor. |
||
| 2280 | */ |
||
| 2281 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
||
| 2282 | clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2283 | |||
| 2284 | /** |
||
| 2285 | * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g., |
||
| 2286 | * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer. |
||
| 2287 | */ |
||
| 2288 | typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability { |
||
| 2289 | /** |
||
| 2290 | * A string that describes the platform for which this structure |
||
| 2291 | * provides availability information. |
||
| 2292 | * |
||
| 2293 | * Possible values are "ios" or "macos". |
||
| 2294 | */ |
||
| 2295 | CXString Platform; |
||
| 2296 | /** |
||
| 2297 | * The version number in which this entity was introduced. |
||
| 2298 | */ |
||
| 2299 | CXVersion Introduced; |
||
| 2300 | /** |
||
| 2301 | * The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is |
||
| 2302 | * still available). |
||
| 2303 | */ |
||
| 2304 | CXVersion Deprecated; |
||
| 2305 | /** |
||
| 2306 | * The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore |
||
| 2307 | * is no longer available. |
||
| 2308 | */ |
||
| 2309 | CXVersion Obsoleted; |
||
| 2310 | /** |
||
| 2311 | * Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform. |
||
| 2312 | */ |
||
| 2313 | int Unavailable; |
||
| 2314 | /** |
||
| 2315 | * An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to |
||
| 2316 | * suggest replacement APIs. |
||
| 2317 | */ |
||
| 2318 | CXString Message; |
||
| 2319 | } CXPlatformAvailability; |
||
| 2320 | |||
| 2321 | /** |
||
| 2322 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to |
||
| 2323 | * on any platforms for which availability information is known. |
||
| 2324 | * |
||
| 2325 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
| 2326 | * |
||
| 2327 | * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
||
| 2328 | * entity is deprecated on all platforms. |
||
| 2329 | * |
||
| 2330 | * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
||
| 2331 | * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client |
||
| 2332 | * is responsible for deallocating this string. |
||
| 2333 | * |
||
| 2334 | * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
||
| 2335 | * entity is unavailable on all platforms. |
||
| 2336 | * |
||
| 2337 | * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
||
| 2338 | * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The |
||
| 2339 | * client is responsible for deallocating this string. |
||
| 2340 | * |
||
| 2341 | * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances |
||
| 2342 | * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either |
||
| 2343 | * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as |
||
| 2344 | * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller. |
||
| 2345 | * |
||
| 2346 | * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the |
||
| 2347 | * \c availability array. |
||
| 2348 | * |
||
| 2349 | * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is |
||
| 2350 | * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size). |
||
| 2351 | * |
||
| 2352 | * Note that the client is responsible for calling |
||
| 2353 | * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the |
||
| 2354 | * platform-availability structures returned. There are |
||
| 2355 | * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures. |
||
| 2356 | */ |
||
| 2357 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability( |
||
| 2358 | CXCursor cursor, int *always_deprecated, CXString *deprecated_message, |
||
| 2359 | int *always_unavailable, CXString *unavailable_message, |
||
| 2360 | CXPlatformAvailability *availability, int availability_size); |
||
| 2361 | |||
| 2362 | /** |
||
| 2363 | * Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure. |
||
| 2364 | */ |
||
| 2365 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
| 2366 | clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability); |
||
| 2367 | |||
| 2368 | /** |
||
| 2369 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration and it has initializer returns |
||
| 2370 | * cursor referring to the initializer otherwise return null cursor. |
||
| 2371 | */ |
||
| 2372 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getVarDeclInitializer(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2373 | |||
| 2374 | /** |
||
| 2375 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has global storage returns 1. |
||
| 2376 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have global storage |
||
| 2377 | * returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
||
| 2378 | */ |
||
| 2379 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclGlobalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2380 | |||
| 2381 | /** |
||
| 2382 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has external storage |
||
| 2383 | * returns 1. If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have |
||
| 2384 | * external storage returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
||
| 2385 | */ |
||
| 2386 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclExternalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2387 | |||
| 2388 | /** |
||
| 2389 | * Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
||
| 2390 | */ |
||
| 2391 | enum CXLanguageKind { |
||
| 2392 | CXLanguage_Invalid = 0, |
||
| 2393 | CXLanguage_C, |
||
| 2394 | CXLanguage_ObjC, |
||
| 2395 | CXLanguage_CPlusPlus |
||
| 2396 | }; |
||
| 2397 | |||
| 2398 | /** |
||
| 2399 | * Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
||
| 2400 | */ |
||
| 2401 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2402 | |||
| 2403 | /** |
||
| 2404 | * Describe the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
||
| 2405 | * referred to by a cursor. |
||
| 2406 | */ |
||
| 2407 | enum CXTLSKind { CXTLS_None = 0, CXTLS_Dynamic, CXTLS_Static }; |
||
| 2408 | |||
| 2409 | /** |
||
| 2410 | * Determine the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
||
| 2411 | * referred to by a cursor. |
||
| 2412 | */ |
||
| 2413 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTLSKind clang_getCursorTLSKind(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2414 | |||
| 2415 | /** |
||
| 2416 | * Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from. |
||
| 2417 | */ |
||
| 2418 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor); |
||
| 2419 | |||
| 2420 | /** |
||
| 2421 | * A fast container representing a set of CXCursors. |
||
| 2422 | */ |
||
| 2423 | typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet; |
||
| 2424 | |||
| 2425 | /** |
||
| 2426 | * Creates an empty CXCursorSet. |
||
| 2427 | */ |
||
| 2428 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void); |
||
| 2429 | |||
| 2430 | /** |
||
| 2431 | * Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory. |
||
| 2432 | */ |
||
| 2433 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset); |
||
| 2434 | |||
| 2435 | /** |
||
| 2436 | * Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor. |
||
| 2437 | * |
||
| 2438 | * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor. |
||
| 2439 | */ |
||
| 2440 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset, |
||
| 2441 | CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2442 | |||
| 2443 | /** |
||
| 2444 | * Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet. |
||
| 2445 | * |
||
| 2446 | * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise. |
||
| 2447 | */ |
||
| 2448 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset, |
||
| 2449 | CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2450 | |||
| 2451 | /** |
||
| 2452 | * Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor. |
||
| 2453 | * |
||
| 2454 | * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains |
||
| 2455 | * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
||
| 2456 | * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by |
||
| 2457 | * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
||
| 2458 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
||
| 2459 | * |
||
| 2460 | * \code |
||
| 2461 | * class C { |
||
| 2462 | * void f(); |
||
| 2463 | * }; |
||
| 2464 | * |
||
| 2465 | * void C::f() { } |
||
| 2466 | * \endcode |
||
| 2467 | * |
||
| 2468 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
||
| 2469 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
||
| 2470 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
||
| 2471 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
||
| 2472 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
||
| 2473 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
||
| 2474 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
||
| 2475 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
||
| 2476 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
||
| 2477 | * |
||
| 2478 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
||
| 2479 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
||
| 2480 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
||
| 2481 | * |
||
| 2482 | * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit. |
||
| 2483 | */ |
||
| 2484 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2485 | |||
| 2486 | /** |
||
| 2487 | * Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor. |
||
| 2488 | * |
||
| 2489 | * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor |
||
| 2490 | * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
||
| 2491 | * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by |
||
| 2492 | * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
||
| 2493 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
||
| 2494 | * |
||
| 2495 | * \code |
||
| 2496 | * class C { |
||
| 2497 | * void f(); |
||
| 2498 | * }; |
||
| 2499 | * |
||
| 2500 | * void C::f() { } |
||
| 2501 | * \endcode |
||
| 2502 | * |
||
| 2503 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
||
| 2504 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
||
| 2505 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
||
| 2506 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
||
| 2507 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
||
| 2508 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
||
| 2509 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
||
| 2510 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
||
| 2511 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
||
| 2512 | * |
||
| 2513 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
||
| 2514 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
||
| 2515 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
||
| 2516 | * |
||
| 2517 | * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is |
||
| 2518 | * the translation unit. |
||
| 2519 | */ |
||
| 2520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2521 | |||
| 2522 | /** |
||
| 2523 | * Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given |
||
| 2524 | * method. |
||
| 2525 | * |
||
| 2526 | * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function, |
||
| 2527 | * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For |
||
| 2528 | * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's |
||
| 2529 | * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same |
||
| 2530 | * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance). |
||
| 2531 | * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass, |
||
| 2532 | * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C |
||
| 2533 | * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its |
||
| 2534 | * corresponding method in the interface. |
||
| 2535 | * |
||
| 2536 | * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member |
||
| 2537 | * function with the same signature that occurs in its base |
||
| 2538 | * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can |
||
| 2539 | * override several virtual member functions coming from different |
||
| 2540 | * base classes. |
||
| 2541 | * |
||
| 2542 | * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden |
||
| 2543 | * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if |
||
| 2544 | * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B |
||
| 2545 | * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B), |
||
| 2546 | * then the only overridden method returned from this function when |
||
| 2547 | * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then |
||
| 2548 | * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden |
||
| 2549 | * methods, to map out the complete method-override set. |
||
| 2550 | * |
||
| 2551 | * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++ |
||
| 2552 | * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this |
||
| 2553 | * method overrides. |
||
| 2554 | * |
||
| 2555 | * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a |
||
| 2556 | * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden |
||
| 2557 | * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be |
||
| 2558 | * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to |
||
| 2559 | * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(). |
||
| 2560 | * |
||
| 2561 | * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden |
||
| 2562 | * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the |
||
| 2563 | * array pointed to by \p overridden. |
||
| 2564 | */ |
||
| 2565 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor, |
||
| 2566 | CXCursor **overridden, |
||
| 2567 | unsigned *num_overridden); |
||
| 2568 | |||
| 2569 | /** |
||
| 2570 | * Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c |
||
| 2571 | * clang_getOverriddenCursors(). |
||
| 2572 | */ |
||
| 2573 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden); |
||
| 2574 | |||
| 2575 | /** |
||
| 2576 | * Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive |
||
| 2577 | * cursor. |
||
| 2578 | */ |
||
| 2579 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 2580 | |||
| 2581 | /** |
||
| 2582 | * @} |
||
| 2583 | */ |
||
| 2584 | |||
| 2585 | /** |
||
| 2586 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code |
||
| 2587 | * |
||
| 2588 | * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These |
||
| 2589 | * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the |
||
| 2590 | * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in |
||
| 2591 | * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back. |
||
| 2592 | * |
||
| 2593 | * @{ |
||
| 2594 | */ |
||
| 2595 | |||
| 2596 | /** |
||
| 2597 | * Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that |
||
| 2598 | * location in the source code. |
||
| 2599 | * |
||
| 2600 | * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation |
||
| 2601 | * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that |
||
| 2602 | * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking |
||
| 2603 | * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the |
||
| 2604 | * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between |
||
| 2605 | * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor() |
||
| 2606 | * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression. |
||
| 2607 | * |
||
| 2608 | * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or |
||
| 2609 | * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found. |
||
| 2610 | */ |
||
| 2611 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation); |
||
| 2612 | |||
| 2613 | /** |
||
| 2614 | * Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced |
||
| 2615 | * by the given cursor. |
||
| 2616 | * |
||
| 2617 | * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that |
||
| 2618 | * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is |
||
| 2619 | * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration. |
||
| 2620 | * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the |
||
| 2621 | * source code. |
||
| 2622 | */ |
||
| 2623 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor); |
||
| 2624 | |||
| 2625 | /** |
||
| 2626 | * Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by |
||
| 2627 | * the given cursor. |
||
| 2628 | * |
||
| 2629 | * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the |
||
| 2630 | * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and |
||
| 2631 | * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a |
||
| 2632 | * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference, |
||
| 2633 | * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced |
||
| 2634 | * entity was actually used). |
||
| 2635 | */ |
||
| 2636 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor); |
||
| 2637 | |||
| 2638 | /** |
||
| 2639 | * @} |
||
| 2640 | */ |
||
| 2641 | |||
| 2642 | /** |
||
| 2643 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors |
||
| 2644 | * |
||
| 2645 | * @{ |
||
| 2646 | */ |
||
| 2647 | |||
| 2648 | /** |
||
| 2649 | * Describes the kind of type |
||
| 2650 | */ |
||
| 2651 | enum CXTypeKind { |
||
| 2652 | /** |
||
| 2653 | * Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available). |
||
| 2654 | */ |
||
| 2655 | CXType_Invalid = 0, |
||
| 2656 | |||
| 2657 | /** |
||
| 2658 | * A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
||
| 2659 | * interface. |
||
| 2660 | */ |
||
| 2661 | CXType_Unexposed = 1, |
||
| 2662 | |||
| 2663 | /* Builtin types */ |
||
| 2664 | CXType_Void = 2, |
||
| 2665 | CXType_Bool = 3, |
||
| 2666 | CXType_Char_U = 4, |
||
| 2667 | CXType_UChar = 5, |
||
| 2668 | CXType_Char16 = 6, |
||
| 2669 | CXType_Char32 = 7, |
||
| 2670 | CXType_UShort = 8, |
||
| 2671 | CXType_UInt = 9, |
||
| 2672 | CXType_ULong = 10, |
||
| 2673 | CXType_ULongLong = 11, |
||
| 2674 | CXType_UInt128 = 12, |
||
| 2675 | CXType_Char_S = 13, |
||
| 2676 | CXType_SChar = 14, |
||
| 2677 | CXType_WChar = 15, |
||
| 2678 | CXType_Short = 16, |
||
| 2679 | CXType_Int = 17, |
||
| 2680 | CXType_Long = 18, |
||
| 2681 | CXType_LongLong = 19, |
||
| 2682 | CXType_Int128 = 20, |
||
| 2683 | CXType_Float = 21, |
||
| 2684 | CXType_Double = 22, |
||
| 2685 | CXType_LongDouble = 23, |
||
| 2686 | CXType_NullPtr = 24, |
||
| 2687 | CXType_Overload = 25, |
||
| 2688 | CXType_Dependent = 26, |
||
| 2689 | CXType_ObjCId = 27, |
||
| 2690 | CXType_ObjCClass = 28, |
||
| 2691 | CXType_ObjCSel = 29, |
||
| 2692 | CXType_Float128 = 30, |
||
| 2693 | CXType_Half = 31, |
||
| 2694 | CXType_Float16 = 32, |
||
| 2695 | CXType_ShortAccum = 33, |
||
| 2696 | CXType_Accum = 34, |
||
| 2697 | CXType_LongAccum = 35, |
||
| 2698 | CXType_UShortAccum = 36, |
||
| 2699 | CXType_UAccum = 37, |
||
| 2700 | CXType_ULongAccum = 38, |
||
| 2701 | CXType_BFloat16 = 39, |
||
| 2702 | CXType_Ibm128 = 40, |
||
| 2703 | CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void, |
||
| 2704 | CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_Ibm128, |
||
| 2705 | |||
| 2706 | CXType_Complex = 100, |
||
| 2707 | CXType_Pointer = 101, |
||
| 2708 | CXType_BlockPointer = 102, |
||
| 2709 | CXType_LValueReference = 103, |
||
| 2710 | CXType_RValueReference = 104, |
||
| 2711 | CXType_Record = 105, |
||
| 2712 | CXType_Enum = 106, |
||
| 2713 | CXType_Typedef = 107, |
||
| 2714 | CXType_ObjCInterface = 108, |
||
| 2715 | CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109, |
||
| 2716 | CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110, |
||
| 2717 | CXType_FunctionProto = 111, |
||
| 2718 | CXType_ConstantArray = 112, |
||
| 2719 | CXType_Vector = 113, |
||
| 2720 | CXType_IncompleteArray = 114, |
||
| 2721 | CXType_VariableArray = 115, |
||
| 2722 | CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116, |
||
| 2723 | CXType_MemberPointer = 117, |
||
| 2724 | CXType_Auto = 118, |
||
| 2725 | |||
| 2726 | /** |
||
| 2727 | * Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword. |
||
| 2728 | * |
||
| 2729 | * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both. |
||
| 2730 | */ |
||
| 2731 | CXType_Elaborated = 119, |
||
| 2732 | |||
| 2733 | /* OpenCL PipeType. */ |
||
| 2734 | CXType_Pipe = 120, |
||
| 2735 | |||
| 2736 | /* OpenCL builtin types. */ |
||
| 2737 | CXType_OCLImage1dRO = 121, |
||
| 2738 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRO = 122, |
||
| 2739 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRO = 123, |
||
| 2740 | CXType_OCLImage2dRO = 124, |
||
| 2741 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRO = 125, |
||
| 2742 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRO = 126, |
||
| 2743 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRO = 127, |
||
| 2744 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARO = 128, |
||
| 2745 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARO = 129, |
||
| 2746 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRO = 130, |
||
| 2747 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRO = 131, |
||
| 2748 | CXType_OCLImage3dRO = 132, |
||
| 2749 | CXType_OCLImage1dWO = 133, |
||
| 2750 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayWO = 134, |
||
| 2751 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferWO = 135, |
||
| 2752 | CXType_OCLImage2dWO = 136, |
||
| 2753 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayWO = 137, |
||
| 2754 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthWO = 138, |
||
| 2755 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthWO = 139, |
||
| 2756 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAAWO = 140, |
||
| 2757 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAAWO = 141, |
||
| 2758 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthWO = 142, |
||
| 2759 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthWO = 143, |
||
| 2760 | CXType_OCLImage3dWO = 144, |
||
| 2761 | CXType_OCLImage1dRW = 145, |
||
| 2762 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRW = 146, |
||
| 2763 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRW = 147, |
||
| 2764 | CXType_OCLImage2dRW = 148, |
||
| 2765 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRW = 149, |
||
| 2766 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRW = 150, |
||
| 2767 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRW = 151, |
||
| 2768 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARW = 152, |
||
| 2769 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARW = 153, |
||
| 2770 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRW = 154, |
||
| 2771 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRW = 155, |
||
| 2772 | CXType_OCLImage3dRW = 156, |
||
| 2773 | CXType_OCLSampler = 157, |
||
| 2774 | CXType_OCLEvent = 158, |
||
| 2775 | CXType_OCLQueue = 159, |
||
| 2776 | CXType_OCLReserveID = 160, |
||
| 2777 | |||
| 2778 | CXType_ObjCObject = 161, |
||
| 2779 | CXType_ObjCTypeParam = 162, |
||
| 2780 | CXType_Attributed = 163, |
||
| 2781 | |||
| 2782 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMcePayload = 164, |
||
| 2783 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImePayload = 165, |
||
| 2784 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefPayload = 166, |
||
| 2785 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicPayload = 167, |
||
| 2786 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMceResult = 168, |
||
| 2787 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResult = 169, |
||
| 2788 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefResult = 170, |
||
| 2789 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicResult = 171, |
||
| 2790 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultSingleRefStreamout = 172, |
||
| 2791 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultDualRefStreamout = 173, |
||
| 2792 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeSingleRefStreamin = 174, |
||
| 2793 | |||
| 2794 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeDualRefStreamin = 175, |
||
| 2795 | |||
| 2796 | CXType_ExtVector = 176, |
||
| 2797 | CXType_Atomic = 177, |
||
| 2798 | CXType_BTFTagAttributed = 178 |
||
| 2799 | }; |
||
| 2800 | |||
| 2801 | /** |
||
| 2802 | * Describes the calling convention of a function type |
||
| 2803 | */ |
||
| 2804 | enum CXCallingConv { |
||
| 2805 | CXCallingConv_Default = 0, |
||
| 2806 | CXCallingConv_C = 1, |
||
| 2807 | CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2, |
||
| 2808 | CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3, |
||
| 2809 | CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4, |
||
| 2810 | CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5, |
||
| 2811 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6, |
||
| 2812 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7, |
||
| 2813 | CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8, |
||
| 2814 | CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9, |
||
| 2815 | CXCallingConv_Win64 = 10, |
||
| 2816 | /* Alias for compatibility with older versions of API. */ |
||
| 2817 | CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = CXCallingConv_Win64, |
||
| 2818 | CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11, |
||
| 2819 | CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12, |
||
| 2820 | CXCallingConv_Swift = 13, |
||
| 2821 | CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14, |
||
| 2822 | CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15, |
||
| 2823 | CXCallingConv_AArch64VectorCall = 16, |
||
| 2824 | CXCallingConv_SwiftAsync = 17, |
||
| 2825 | CXCallingConv_AArch64SVEPCS = 18, |
||
| 2826 | |||
| 2827 | CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100, |
||
| 2828 | CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200 |
||
| 2829 | }; |
||
| 2830 | |||
| 2831 | /** |
||
| 2832 | * The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree. |
||
| 2833 | * |
||
| 2834 | */ |
||
| 2835 | typedef struct { |
||
| 2836 | enum CXTypeKind kind; |
||
| 2837 | void *data[2]; |
||
| 2838 | } CXType; |
||
| 2839 | |||
| 2840 | /** |
||
| 2841 | * Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any). |
||
| 2842 | */ |
||
| 2843 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2844 | |||
| 2845 | /** |
||
| 2846 | * Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the |
||
| 2847 | * language of the translation unit from which it came. |
||
| 2848 | * |
||
| 2849 | * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned. |
||
| 2850 | */ |
||
| 2851 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT); |
||
| 2852 | |||
| 2853 | /** |
||
| 2854 | * Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration. |
||
| 2855 | * |
||
| 2856 | * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is |
||
| 2857 | * returned. |
||
| 2858 | */ |
||
| 2859 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2860 | |||
| 2861 | /** |
||
| 2862 | * Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration. |
||
| 2863 | * |
||
| 2864 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is |
||
| 2865 | * returned. |
||
| 2866 | */ |
||
| 2867 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2868 | |||
| 2869 | /** |
||
| 2870 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed |
||
| 2871 | * long long. |
||
| 2872 | * |
||
| 2873 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is |
||
| 2874 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
||
| 2875 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
||
| 2876 | */ |
||
| 2877 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2878 | |||
| 2879 | /** |
||
| 2880 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned |
||
| 2881 | * long long. |
||
| 2882 | * |
||
| 2883 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is |
||
| 2884 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
||
| 2885 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
||
| 2886 | */ |
||
| 2887 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
| 2888 | clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2889 | |||
| 2890 | /** |
||
| 2891 | * Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer. |
||
| 2892 | * |
||
| 2893 | * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
| 2894 | */ |
||
| 2895 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2896 | |||
| 2897 | /** |
||
| 2898 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given |
||
| 2899 | * cursor. |
||
| 2900 | * |
||
| 2901 | * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for |
||
| 2902 | * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned. |
||
| 2903 | */ |
||
| 2904 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2905 | |||
| 2906 | /** |
||
| 2907 | * Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method. |
||
| 2908 | * |
||
| 2909 | * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations |
||
| 2910 | * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an |
||
| 2911 | * invalid cursor is returned. |
||
| 2912 | */ |
||
| 2913 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i); |
||
| 2914 | |||
| 2915 | /** |
||
| 2916 | * Describes the kind of a template argument. |
||
| 2917 | * |
||
| 2918 | * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full |
||
| 2919 | * element descriptions. |
||
| 2920 | */ |
||
| 2921 | enum CXTemplateArgumentKind { |
||
| 2922 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null, |
||
| 2923 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type, |
||
| 2924 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration, |
||
| 2925 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr, |
||
| 2926 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral, |
||
| 2927 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template, |
||
| 2928 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion, |
||
| 2929 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression, |
||
| 2930 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack, |
||
| 2931 | /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */ |
||
| 2932 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid |
||
| 2933 | }; |
||
| 2934 | |||
| 2935 | /** |
||
| 2936 | * Returns the number of template args of a function, struct, or class decl |
||
| 2937 | * representing a template specialization. |
||
| 2938 | * |
||
| 2939 | * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function |
||
| 2940 | * declaration, -1 is returned. |
||
| 2941 | * |
||
| 2942 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
| 2943 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
| 2944 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
| 2945 | * |
||
| 2946 | * template <> |
||
| 2947 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
| 2948 | * |
||
| 2949 | * The value 3 would be returned from this call. |
||
| 2950 | */ |
||
| 2951 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C); |
||
| 2952 | |||
| 2953 | /** |
||
| 2954 | * Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C. |
||
| 2955 | * |
||
| 2956 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, or |
||
| 2957 | * ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization, an invalid template argument kind is |
||
| 2958 | * returned. |
||
| 2959 | * |
||
| 2960 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
| 2961 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
| 2962 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
| 2963 | * |
||
| 2964 | * template <> |
||
| 2965 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
| 2966 | * |
||
| 2967 | * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned, |
||
| 2968 | * respectively. |
||
| 2969 | */ |
||
| 2970 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind |
||
| 2971 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
||
| 2972 | |||
| 2973 | /** |
||
| 2974 | * Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a |
||
| 2975 | * function decl representing a template specialization. |
||
| 2976 | * |
||
| 2977 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, |
||
| 2978 | * ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization whose I'th template argument |
||
| 2979 | * has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 2980 | * |
||
| 2981 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
| 2982 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
| 2983 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
| 2984 | * |
||
| 2985 | * template <> |
||
| 2986 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
| 2987 | * |
||
| 2988 | * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned. |
||
| 2989 | * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2. |
||
| 2990 | */ |
||
| 2991 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C, |
||
| 2992 | unsigned I); |
||
| 2993 | |||
| 2994 | /** |
||
| 2995 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
||
| 2996 | * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long. |
||
| 2997 | * |
||
| 2998 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
||
| 2999 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization |
||
| 3000 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
||
| 3001 | * |
||
| 3002 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
| 3003 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
| 3004 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
| 3005 | * |
||
| 3006 | * template <> |
||
| 3007 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
||
| 3008 | * |
||
| 3009 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively. |
||
| 3010 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
||
| 3011 | */ |
||
| 3012 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C, |
||
| 3013 | unsigned I); |
||
| 3014 | |||
| 3015 | /** |
||
| 3016 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
||
| 3017 | * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long. |
||
| 3018 | * |
||
| 3019 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
||
| 3020 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization or |
||
| 3021 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
||
| 3022 | * |
||
| 3023 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
||
| 3024 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
||
| 3025 | * void foo() { ... } |
||
| 3026 | * |
||
| 3027 | * template <> |
||
| 3028 | * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>(); |
||
| 3029 | * |
||
| 3030 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively. |
||
| 3031 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
||
| 3032 | */ |
||
| 3033 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
| 3034 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
||
| 3035 | |||
| 3036 | /** |
||
| 3037 | * Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type. |
||
| 3038 | * |
||
| 3039 | * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and |
||
| 3040 | * zero otherwise. |
||
| 3041 | */ |
||
| 3042 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B); |
||
| 3043 | |||
| 3044 | /** |
||
| 3045 | * Return the canonical type for a CXType. |
||
| 3046 | * |
||
| 3047 | * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways |
||
| 3048 | * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying |
||
| 3049 | * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef |
||
| 3050 | * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'. |
||
| 3051 | */ |
||
| 3052 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T); |
||
| 3053 | |||
| 3054 | /** |
||
| 3055 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set, |
||
| 3056 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a |
||
| 3057 | * different level. |
||
| 3058 | */ |
||
| 3059 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
| 3060 | |||
| 3061 | /** |
||
| 3062 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is |
||
| 3063 | * function like. |
||
| 3064 | */ |
||
| 3065 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3066 | |||
| 3067 | /** |
||
| 3068 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a |
||
| 3069 | * builtin one. |
||
| 3070 | */ |
||
| 3071 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3072 | |||
| 3073 | /** |
||
| 3074 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an |
||
| 3075 | * inline declaration. |
||
| 3076 | */ |
||
| 3077 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3078 | |||
| 3079 | /** |
||
| 3080 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set, |
||
| 3081 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at |
||
| 3082 | * a different level. |
||
| 3083 | */ |
||
| 3084 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
| 3085 | |||
| 3086 | /** |
||
| 3087 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set, |
||
| 3088 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a |
||
| 3089 | * different level. |
||
| 3090 | */ |
||
| 3091 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T); |
||
| 3092 | |||
| 3093 | /** |
||
| 3094 | * Returns the address space of the given type. |
||
| 3095 | */ |
||
| 3096 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getAddressSpace(CXType T); |
||
| 3097 | |||
| 3098 | /** |
||
| 3099 | * Returns the typedef name of the given type. |
||
| 3100 | */ |
||
| 3101 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypedefName(CXType CT); |
||
| 3102 | |||
| 3103 | /** |
||
| 3104 | * For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee. |
||
| 3105 | */ |
||
| 3106 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T); |
||
| 3107 | |||
| 3108 | /** |
||
| 3109 | * Retrieve the unqualified variant of the given type, removing as |
||
| 3110 | * little sugar as possible. |
||
| 3111 | * |
||
| 3112 | * For example, given the following series of typedefs: |
||
| 3113 | * |
||
| 3114 | * \code |
||
| 3115 | * typedef int Integer; |
||
| 3116 | * typedef const Integer CInteger; |
||
| 3117 | * typedef CInteger DifferenceType; |
||
| 3118 | * \endcode |
||
| 3119 | * |
||
| 3120 | * Executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on a \c CXType that |
||
| 3121 | * represents \c DifferenceType, will desugar to a type representing |
||
| 3122 | * \c Integer, that has no qualifiers. |
||
| 3123 | * |
||
| 3124 | * And, executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on the type of the |
||
| 3125 | * first argument of the following function declaration: |
||
| 3126 | * |
||
| 3127 | * \code |
||
| 3128 | * void foo(const int); |
||
| 3129 | * \endcode |
||
| 3130 | * |
||
| 3131 | * Will return a type representing \c int, removing the \c const |
||
| 3132 | * qualifier. |
||
| 3133 | * |
||
| 3134 | * Sugar over array types is not desugared. |
||
| 3135 | * |
||
| 3136 | * A type can be checked for qualifiers with \c |
||
| 3137 | * clang_isConstQualifiedType(), \c clang_isVolatileQualifiedType() |
||
| 3138 | * and \c clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(). |
||
| 3139 | * |
||
| 3140 | * A type that resulted from a call to \c clang_getUnqualifiedType |
||
| 3141 | * will return \c false for all of the above calls. |
||
| 3142 | */ |
||
| 3143 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getUnqualifiedType(CXType CT); |
||
| 3144 | |||
| 3145 | /** |
||
| 3146 | * For reference types (e.g., "const int&"), returns the type that the |
||
| 3147 | * reference refers to (e.g "const int"). |
||
| 3148 | * |
||
| 3149 | * Otherwise, returns the type itself. |
||
| 3150 | * |
||
| 3151 | * A type that has kind \c CXType_LValueReference or |
||
| 3152 | * \c CXType_RValueReference is a reference type. |
||
| 3153 | */ |
||
| 3154 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getNonReferenceType(CXType CT); |
||
| 3155 | |||
| 3156 | /** |
||
| 3157 | * Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type. |
||
| 3158 | */ |
||
| 3159 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T); |
||
| 3160 | |||
| 3161 | /** |
||
| 3162 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration. |
||
| 3163 | */ |
||
| 3164 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3165 | |||
| 3166 | /** |
||
| 3167 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType. |
||
| 3168 | */ |
||
| 3169 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type); |
||
| 3170 | |||
| 3171 | /** |
||
| 3172 | * Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind. |
||
| 3173 | */ |
||
| 3174 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K); |
||
| 3175 | |||
| 3176 | /** |
||
| 3177 | * Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type. |
||
| 3178 | * |
||
| 3179 | * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned. |
||
| 3180 | */ |
||
| 3181 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T); |
||
| 3182 | |||
| 3183 | /** |
||
| 3184 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a function type. |
||
| 3185 | * |
||
| 3186 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3187 | */ |
||
| 3188 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T); |
||
| 3189 | |||
| 3190 | /** |
||
| 3191 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a function type. |
||
| 3192 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
||
| 3193 | * |
||
| 3194 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an error code of -1 is returned. |
||
| 3195 | */ |
||
| 3196 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getExceptionSpecificationType(CXType T); |
||
| 3197 | |||
| 3198 | /** |
||
| 3199 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a |
||
| 3200 | * function type. |
||
| 3201 | * |
||
| 3202 | * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
| 3203 | */ |
||
| 3204 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T); |
||
| 3205 | |||
| 3206 | /** |
||
| 3207 | * Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type. |
||
| 3208 | * |
||
| 3209 | * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough |
||
| 3210 | * parameters, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3211 | */ |
||
| 3212 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
| 3213 | |||
| 3214 | /** |
||
| 3215 | * Retrieves the base type of the ObjCObjectType. |
||
| 3216 | * |
||
| 3217 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3218 | */ |
||
| 3219 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCObjectBaseType(CXType T); |
||
| 3220 | |||
| 3221 | /** |
||
| 3222 | * Retrieve the number of protocol references associated with an ObjC object/id. |
||
| 3223 | * |
||
| 3224 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
||
| 3225 | */ |
||
| 3226 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCProtocolRefs(CXType T); |
||
| 3227 | |||
| 3228 | /** |
||
| 3229 | * Retrieve the decl for a protocol reference for an ObjC object/id. |
||
| 3230 | * |
||
| 3231 | * If the type is not an ObjC object or there are not enough protocol |
||
| 3232 | * references, an invalid cursor is returned. |
||
| 3233 | */ |
||
| 3234 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Type_getObjCProtocolDecl(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
| 3235 | |||
| 3236 | /** |
||
| 3237 | * Retrieve the number of type arguments associated with an ObjC object. |
||
| 3238 | * |
||
| 3239 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
||
| 3240 | */ |
||
| 3241 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCTypeArgs(CXType T); |
||
| 3242 | |||
| 3243 | /** |
||
| 3244 | * Retrieve a type argument associated with an ObjC object. |
||
| 3245 | * |
||
| 3246 | * If the type is not an ObjC or the index is not valid, |
||
| 3247 | * an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3248 | */ |
||
| 3249 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCTypeArg(CXType T, unsigned i); |
||
| 3250 | |||
| 3251 | /** |
||
| 3252 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise. |
||
| 3253 | */ |
||
| 3254 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T); |
||
| 3255 | |||
| 3256 | /** |
||
| 3257 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor. |
||
| 3258 | * |
||
| 3259 | * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method. |
||
| 3260 | */ |
||
| 3261 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3262 | |||
| 3263 | /** |
||
| 3264 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a given cursor. |
||
| 3265 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
||
| 3266 | * |
||
| 3267 | * This only returns a valid result if the cursor refers to a function or |
||
| 3268 | * method. |
||
| 3269 | */ |
||
| 3270 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorExceptionSpecificationType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3271 | |||
| 3272 | /** |
||
| 3273 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0 |
||
| 3274 | * otherwise. |
||
| 3275 | */ |
||
| 3276 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T); |
||
| 3277 | |||
| 3278 | /** |
||
| 3279 | * Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type. |
||
| 3280 | * |
||
| 3281 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type, |
||
| 3282 | * an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3283 | */ |
||
| 3284 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T); |
||
| 3285 | |||
| 3286 | /** |
||
| 3287 | * Return the number of elements of an array or vector type. |
||
| 3288 | * |
||
| 3289 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type, |
||
| 3290 | * -1 is returned. |
||
| 3291 | */ |
||
| 3292 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T); |
||
| 3293 | |||
| 3294 | /** |
||
| 3295 | * Return the element type of an array type. |
||
| 3296 | * |
||
| 3297 | * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3298 | */ |
||
| 3299 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T); |
||
| 3300 | |||
| 3301 | /** |
||
| 3302 | * Return the array size of a constant array. |
||
| 3303 | * |
||
| 3304 | * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
||
| 3305 | */ |
||
| 3306 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T); |
||
| 3307 | |||
| 3308 | /** |
||
| 3309 | * Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id. |
||
| 3310 | * |
||
| 3311 | * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3312 | */ |
||
| 3313 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T); |
||
| 3314 | |||
| 3315 | /** |
||
| 3316 | * Determine if a typedef is 'transparent' tag. |
||
| 3317 | * |
||
| 3318 | * A typedef is considered 'transparent' if it shares a name and spelling |
||
| 3319 | * location with its underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro. |
||
| 3320 | * |
||
| 3321 | * \returns non-zero if transparent and zero otherwise. |
||
| 3322 | */ |
||
| 3323 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_isTransparentTagTypedef(CXType T); |
||
| 3324 | |||
| 3325 | enum CXTypeNullabilityKind { |
||
| 3326 | /** |
||
| 3327 | * Values of this type can never be null. |
||
| 3328 | */ |
||
| 3329 | CXTypeNullability_NonNull = 0, |
||
| 3330 | /** |
||
| 3331 | * Values of this type can be null. |
||
| 3332 | */ |
||
| 3333 | CXTypeNullability_Nullable = 1, |
||
| 3334 | /** |
||
| 3335 | * Whether values of this type can be null is (explicitly) |
||
| 3336 | * unspecified. This captures a (fairly rare) case where we |
||
| 3337 | * can't conclude anything about the nullability of the type even |
||
| 3338 | * though it has been considered. |
||
| 3339 | */ |
||
| 3340 | CXTypeNullability_Unspecified = 2, |
||
| 3341 | /** |
||
| 3342 | * Nullability is not applicable to this type. |
||
| 3343 | */ |
||
| 3344 | CXTypeNullability_Invalid = 3, |
||
| 3345 | |||
| 3346 | /** |
||
| 3347 | * Generally behaves like Nullable, except when used in a block parameter that |
||
| 3348 | * was imported into a swift async method. There, swift will assume that the |
||
| 3349 | * parameter can get null even if no error occurred. _Nullable parameters are |
||
| 3350 | * assumed to only get null on error. |
||
| 3351 | */ |
||
| 3352 | CXTypeNullability_NullableResult = 4 |
||
| 3353 | }; |
||
| 3354 | |||
| 3355 | /** |
||
| 3356 | * Retrieve the nullability kind of a pointer type. |
||
| 3357 | */ |
||
| 3358 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTypeNullabilityKind clang_Type_getNullability(CXType T); |
||
| 3359 | |||
| 3360 | /** |
||
| 3361 | * List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf, |
||
| 3362 | * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and |
||
| 3363 | * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf. |
||
| 3364 | * |
||
| 3365 | * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not |
||
| 3366 | * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof. |
||
| 3367 | */ |
||
| 3368 | enum CXTypeLayoutError { |
||
| 3369 | /** |
||
| 3370 | * Type is of kind CXType_Invalid. |
||
| 3371 | */ |
||
| 3372 | CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1, |
||
| 3373 | /** |
||
| 3374 | * The type is an incomplete Type. |
||
| 3375 | */ |
||
| 3376 | CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2, |
||
| 3377 | /** |
||
| 3378 | * The type is a dependent Type. |
||
| 3379 | */ |
||
| 3380 | CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3, |
||
| 3381 | /** |
||
| 3382 | * The type is not a constant size type. |
||
| 3383 | */ |
||
| 3384 | CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4, |
||
| 3385 | /** |
||
| 3386 | * The Field name is not valid for this record. |
||
| 3387 | */ |
||
| 3388 | CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5, |
||
| 3389 | /** |
||
| 3390 | * The type is undeduced. |
||
| 3391 | */ |
||
| 3392 | CXTypeLayoutError_Undeduced = -6 |
||
| 3393 | }; |
||
| 3394 | |||
| 3395 | /** |
||
| 3396 | * Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof] |
||
| 3397 | * standard. |
||
| 3398 | * |
||
| 3399 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
| 3400 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
||
| 3401 | * is returned. |
||
| 3402 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
||
| 3403 | * returned. |
||
| 3404 | * If the type declaration is not a constant size type, |
||
| 3405 | * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned. |
||
| 3406 | */ |
||
| 3407 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T); |
||
| 3408 | |||
| 3409 | /** |
||
| 3410 | * Return the class type of an member pointer type. |
||
| 3411 | * |
||
| 3412 | * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3413 | */ |
||
| 3414 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T); |
||
| 3415 | |||
| 3416 | /** |
||
| 3417 | * Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard. |
||
| 3418 | * |
||
| 3419 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
| 3420 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
||
| 3421 | * is returned. |
||
| 3422 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
||
| 3423 | * returned. |
||
| 3424 | */ |
||
| 3425 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T); |
||
| 3426 | |||
| 3427 | /** |
||
| 3428 | * Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits |
||
| 3429 | * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4] |
||
| 3430 | * |
||
| 3431 | * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid |
||
| 3432 | * is returned. |
||
| 3433 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
||
| 3434 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
||
| 3435 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
||
| 3436 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
||
| 3437 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
||
| 3438 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
||
| 3439 | */ |
||
| 3440 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S); |
||
| 3441 | |||
| 3442 | /** |
||
| 3443 | * Return the type that was modified by this attributed type. |
||
| 3444 | * |
||
| 3445 | * If the type is not an attributed type, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3446 | */ |
||
| 3447 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getModifiedType(CXType T); |
||
| 3448 | |||
| 3449 | /** |
||
| 3450 | * Gets the type contained by this atomic type. |
||
| 3451 | * |
||
| 3452 | * If a non-atomic type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
||
| 3453 | */ |
||
| 3454 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getValueType(CXType CT); |
||
| 3455 | |||
| 3456 | /** |
||
| 3457 | * Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor. |
||
| 3458 | * |
||
| 3459 | * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned. |
||
| 3460 | * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration, |
||
| 3461 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
||
| 3462 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
||
| 3463 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
||
| 3464 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
||
| 3465 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
||
| 3466 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
||
| 3467 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
||
| 3468 | */ |
||
| 3469 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3470 | |||
| 3471 | /** |
||
| 3472 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous |
||
| 3473 | * tag or namespace |
||
| 3474 | */ |
||
| 3475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3476 | |||
| 3477 | /** |
||
| 3478 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record |
||
| 3479 | * declaration. |
||
| 3480 | */ |
||
| 3481 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymousRecordDecl(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3482 | |||
| 3483 | /** |
||
| 3484 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an inline namespace |
||
| 3485 | * declaration. |
||
| 3486 | */ |
||
| 3487 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isInlineNamespace(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3488 | |||
| 3489 | enum CXRefQualifierKind { |
||
| 3490 | /** No ref-qualifier was provided. */ |
||
| 3491 | CXRefQualifier_None = 0, |
||
| 3492 | /** An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */ |
||
| 3493 | CXRefQualifier_LValue, |
||
| 3494 | /** An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */ |
||
| 3495 | CXRefQualifier_RValue |
||
| 3496 | }; |
||
| 3497 | |||
| 3498 | /** |
||
| 3499 | * Returns the number of template arguments for given template |
||
| 3500 | * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization. |
||
| 3501 | */ |
||
| 3502 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T); |
||
| 3503 | |||
| 3504 | /** |
||
| 3505 | * Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization |
||
| 3506 | * at given index. |
||
| 3507 | * |
||
| 3508 | * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle |
||
| 3509 | * template template arguments or variadic packs. |
||
| 3510 | */ |
||
| 3511 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, |
||
| 3512 | unsigned i); |
||
| 3513 | |||
| 3514 | /** |
||
| 3515 | * Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method. |
||
| 3516 | * |
||
| 3517 | * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types |
||
| 3518 | * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned. |
||
| 3519 | */ |
||
| 3520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T); |
||
| 3521 | |||
| 3522 | /** |
||
| 3523 | * Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a |
||
| 3524 | * bitfield. |
||
| 3525 | */ |
||
| 3526 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C); |
||
| 3527 | |||
| 3528 | /** |
||
| 3529 | * Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind |
||
| 3530 | * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual. |
||
| 3531 | */ |
||
| 3532 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor); |
||
| 3533 | |||
| 3534 | /** |
||
| 3535 | * Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a |
||
| 3536 | * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier. |
||
| 3537 | */ |
||
| 3538 | enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier { |
||
| 3539 | CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier, |
||
| 3540 | CX_CXXPublic, |
||
| 3541 | CX_CXXProtected, |
||
| 3542 | CX_CXXPrivate |
||
| 3543 | }; |
||
| 3544 | |||
| 3545 | /** |
||
| 3546 | * Returns the access control level for the referenced object. |
||
| 3547 | * |
||
| 3548 | * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within |
||
| 3549 | * its parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base |
||
| 3550 | * specifier or access specifier, the specifier itself is returned. |
||
| 3551 | */ |
||
| 3552 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor); |
||
| 3553 | |||
| 3554 | /** |
||
| 3555 | * Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid |
||
| 3556 | * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration. |
||
| 3557 | */ |
||
| 3558 | enum CX_StorageClass { |
||
| 3559 | CX_SC_Invalid, |
||
| 3560 | CX_SC_None, |
||
| 3561 | CX_SC_Extern, |
||
| 3562 | CX_SC_Static, |
||
| 3563 | CX_SC_PrivateExtern, |
||
| 3564 | CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal, |
||
| 3565 | CX_SC_Auto, |
||
| 3566 | CX_SC_Register |
||
| 3567 | }; |
||
| 3568 | |||
| 3569 | /** |
||
| 3570 | * Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration. |
||
| 3571 | * |
||
| 3572 | * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration, |
||
| 3573 | * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class. |
||
| 3574 | */ |
||
| 3575 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor); |
||
| 3576 | |||
| 3577 | /** |
||
| 3578 | * Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a |
||
| 3579 | * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
||
| 3580 | * |
||
| 3581 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
||
| 3582 | * |
||
| 3583 | * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it |
||
| 3584 | * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0. |
||
| 3585 | */ |
||
| 3586 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 3587 | |||
| 3588 | /** |
||
| 3589 | * Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced |
||
| 3590 | * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
||
| 3591 | * |
||
| 3592 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
||
| 3593 | * |
||
| 3594 | * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in |
||
| 3595 | * the cursor. |
||
| 3596 | * |
||
| 3597 | * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given |
||
| 3598 | * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an |
||
| 3599 | * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds, |
||
| 3600 | * returns \c clang_getNullCursor(); |
||
| 3601 | */ |
||
| 3602 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor, |
||
| 3603 | unsigned index); |
||
| 3604 | |||
| 3605 | /** |
||
| 3606 | * @} |
||
| 3607 | */ |
||
| 3608 | |||
| 3609 | /** |
||
| 3610 | * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes |
||
| 3611 | * |
||
| 3612 | * @{ |
||
| 3613 | */ |
||
| 3614 | |||
| 3615 | /** |
||
| 3616 | * For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute, |
||
| 3617 | * this function returns the collection element type. |
||
| 3618 | * |
||
| 3619 | */ |
||
| 3620 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor); |
||
| 3621 | |||
| 3622 | /** |
||
| 3623 | * @} |
||
| 3624 | */ |
||
| 3625 | |||
| 3626 | /** |
||
| 3627 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors |
||
| 3628 | * |
||
| 3629 | * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree |
||
| 3630 | * using cursors. |
||
| 3631 | * |
||
| 3632 | * @{ |
||
| 3633 | */ |
||
| 3634 | |||
| 3635 | /** |
||
| 3636 | * Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular |
||
| 3637 | * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor. |
||
| 3638 | * |
||
| 3639 | * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each |
||
| 3640 | * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed. |
||
| 3641 | */ |
||
| 3642 | enum CXChildVisitResult { |
||
| 3643 | /** |
||
| 3644 | * Terminates the cursor traversal. |
||
| 3645 | */ |
||
| 3646 | CXChildVisit_Break, |
||
| 3647 | /** |
||
| 3648 | * Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of |
||
| 3649 | * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children. |
||
| 3650 | */ |
||
| 3651 | CXChildVisit_Continue, |
||
| 3652 | /** |
||
| 3653 | * Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using |
||
| 3654 | * the same visitor and client data. |
||
| 3655 | */ |
||
| 3656 | CXChildVisit_Recurse |
||
| 3657 | }; |
||
| 3658 | |||
| 3659 | /** |
||
| 3660 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
||
| 3661 | * |
||
| 3662 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by |
||
| 3663 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
| 3664 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor, |
||
| 3665 | * and its third argument is the client data provided to |
||
| 3666 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
||
| 3667 | * |
||
| 3668 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
||
| 3669 | * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
||
| 3670 | */ |
||
| 3671 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor, |
||
| 3672 | CXCursor parent, |
||
| 3673 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 3674 | |||
| 3675 | /** |
||
| 3676 | * Visit the children of a particular cursor. |
||
| 3677 | * |
||
| 3678 | * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor, |
||
| 3679 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
||
| 3680 | * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns |
||
| 3681 | * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if |
||
| 3682 | * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
||
| 3683 | * |
||
| 3684 | * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of |
||
| 3685 | * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by |
||
| 3686 | * definition, have no children). |
||
| 3687 | * |
||
| 3688 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
||
| 3689 | * child of \p parent. |
||
| 3690 | * |
||
| 3691 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
| 3692 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
||
| 3693 | * |
||
| 3694 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
||
| 3695 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
||
| 3696 | */ |
||
| 3697 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent, |
||
| 3698 | CXCursorVisitor visitor, |
||
| 3699 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 3700 | #ifdef __has_feature |
||
| 3701 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
||
| 3702 | /** |
||
| 3703 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
||
| 3704 | * |
||
| 3705 | * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by |
||
| 3706 | * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
| 3707 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor. |
||
| 3708 | * |
||
| 3709 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
||
| 3710 | * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). |
||
| 3711 | */ |
||
| 3712 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, |
||
| 3713 | CXCursor parent); |
||
| 3714 | |||
| 3715 | /** |
||
| 3716 | * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves |
||
| 3717 | * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects. |
||
| 3718 | */ |
||
| 3719 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 3720 | clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent, CXCursorVisitorBlock block); |
||
| 3721 | #endif |
||
| 3722 | #endif |
||
| 3723 | |||
| 3724 | /** |
||
| 3725 | * @} |
||
| 3726 | */ |
||
| 3727 | |||
| 3728 | /** |
||
| 3729 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST |
||
| 3730 | * |
||
| 3731 | * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and |
||
| 3732 | * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced |
||
| 3733 | * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference, |
||
| 3734 | * and associate declarations with their definitions. |
||
| 3735 | * |
||
| 3736 | * @{ |
||
| 3737 | */ |
||
| 3738 | |||
| 3739 | /** |
||
| 3740 | * Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced |
||
| 3741 | * by the given cursor. |
||
| 3742 | * |
||
| 3743 | * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular |
||
| 3744 | * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be |
||
| 3745 | * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in |
||
| 3746 | * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit. |
||
| 3747 | */ |
||
| 3748 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor); |
||
| 3749 | |||
| 3750 | /** |
||
| 3751 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class. |
||
| 3752 | */ |
||
| 3753 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name); |
||
| 3754 | |||
| 3755 | /** |
||
| 3756 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category. |
||
| 3757 | */ |
||
| 3758 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory( |
||
| 3759 | const char *class_name, const char *category_name); |
||
| 3760 | |||
| 3761 | /** |
||
| 3762 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol. |
||
| 3763 | */ |
||
| 3764 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
| 3765 | clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name); |
||
| 3766 | |||
| 3767 | /** |
||
| 3768 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and |
||
| 3769 | * the USR for its containing class. |
||
| 3770 | */ |
||
| 3771 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name, |
||
| 3772 | CXString classUSR); |
||
| 3773 | |||
| 3774 | /** |
||
| 3775 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and |
||
| 3776 | * the USR for its containing class. |
||
| 3777 | */ |
||
| 3778 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name, |
||
| 3779 | unsigned isInstanceMethod, |
||
| 3780 | CXString classUSR); |
||
| 3781 | |||
| 3782 | /** |
||
| 3783 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR |
||
| 3784 | * for its containing class. |
||
| 3785 | */ |
||
| 3786 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property, |
||
| 3787 | CXString classUSR); |
||
| 3788 | |||
| 3789 | /** |
||
| 3790 | * Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
||
| 3791 | */ |
||
| 3792 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor); |
||
| 3793 | |||
| 3794 | /** |
||
| 3795 | * Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name. |
||
| 3796 | * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for |
||
| 3797 | * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple |
||
| 3798 | * pieces for each selector identifier. |
||
| 3799 | * |
||
| 3800 | * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater |
||
| 3801 | * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range. |
||
| 3802 | * |
||
| 3803 | * \param options Reserved. |
||
| 3804 | */ |
||
| 3805 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange( |
||
| 3806 | CXCursor, unsigned pieceIndex, unsigned options); |
||
| 3807 | |||
| 3808 | /** |
||
| 3809 | * Opaque pointer representing a policy that controls pretty printing |
||
| 3810 | * for \c clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted. |
||
| 3811 | */ |
||
| 3812 | typedef void *CXPrintingPolicy; |
||
| 3813 | |||
| 3814 | /** |
||
| 3815 | * Properties for the printing policy. |
||
| 3816 | * |
||
| 3817 | * See \c clang::PrintingPolicy for more information. |
||
| 3818 | */ |
||
| 3819 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty { |
||
| 3820 | CXPrintingPolicy_Indentation, |
||
| 3821 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressSpecifiers, |
||
| 3822 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTagKeyword, |
||
| 3823 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeTagDefinition, |
||
| 3824 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressScope, |
||
| 3825 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressUnwrittenScope, |
||
| 3826 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressInitializers, |
||
| 3827 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantArraySizeAsWritten, |
||
| 3828 | CXPrintingPolicy_AnonymousTagLocations, |
||
| 3829 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressStrongLifetime, |
||
| 3830 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressLifetimeQualifiers, |
||
| 3831 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTemplateArgsInCXXConstructors, |
||
| 3832 | CXPrintingPolicy_Bool, |
||
| 3833 | CXPrintingPolicy_Restrict, |
||
| 3834 | CXPrintingPolicy_Alignof, |
||
| 3835 | CXPrintingPolicy_UnderscoreAlignof, |
||
| 3836 | CXPrintingPolicy_UseVoidForZeroParams, |
||
| 3837 | CXPrintingPolicy_TerseOutput, |
||
| 3838 | CXPrintingPolicy_PolishForDeclaration, |
||
| 3839 | CXPrintingPolicy_Half, |
||
| 3840 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSWChar, |
||
| 3841 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeNewlines, |
||
| 3842 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSVCFormatting, |
||
| 3843 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantsAsWritten, |
||
| 3844 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressImplicitBase, |
||
| 3845 | CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName, |
||
| 3846 | |||
| 3847 | CXPrintingPolicy_LastProperty = CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName |
||
| 3848 | }; |
||
| 3849 | |||
| 3850 | /** |
||
| 3851 | * Get a property value for the given printing policy. |
||
| 3852 | */ |
||
| 3853 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 3854 | clang_PrintingPolicy_getProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
||
| 3855 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property); |
||
| 3856 | |||
| 3857 | /** |
||
| 3858 | * Set a property value for the given printing policy. |
||
| 3859 | */ |
||
| 3860 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
||
| 3861 | clang_PrintingPolicy_setProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
||
| 3862 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property, |
||
| 3863 | unsigned Value); |
||
| 3864 | |||
| 3865 | /** |
||
| 3866 | * Retrieve the default policy for the cursor. |
||
| 3867 | * |
||
| 3868 | * The policy should be released after use with \c |
||
| 3869 | * clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose. |
||
| 3870 | */ |
||
| 3871 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXPrintingPolicy clang_getCursorPrintingPolicy(CXCursor); |
||
| 3872 | |||
| 3873 | /** |
||
| 3874 | * Release a printing policy. |
||
| 3875 | */ |
||
| 3876 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose(CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
||
| 3877 | |||
| 3878 | /** |
||
| 3879 | * Pretty print declarations. |
||
| 3880 | * |
||
| 3881 | * \param Cursor The cursor representing a declaration. |
||
| 3882 | * |
||
| 3883 | * \param Policy The policy to control the entities being printed. If |
||
| 3884 | * NULL, a default policy is used. |
||
| 3885 | * |
||
| 3886 | * \returns The pretty printed declaration or the empty string for |
||
| 3887 | * other cursors. |
||
| 3888 | */ |
||
| 3889 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted(CXCursor Cursor, |
||
| 3890 | CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
||
| 3891 | |||
| 3892 | /** |
||
| 3893 | * Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
||
| 3894 | * |
||
| 3895 | * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor, |
||
| 3896 | * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a |
||
| 3897 | * class template specialization. |
||
| 3898 | */ |
||
| 3899 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor); |
||
| 3900 | |||
| 3901 | /** For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the |
||
| 3902 | * entity that it references. |
||
| 3903 | * |
||
| 3904 | * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an |
||
| 3905 | * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class. |
||
| 3906 | * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the |
||
| 3907 | * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or |
||
| 3908 | * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged. |
||
| 3909 | * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor. |
||
| 3910 | */ |
||
| 3911 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor); |
||
| 3912 | |||
| 3913 | /** |
||
| 3914 | * For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration |
||
| 3915 | * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of |
||
| 3916 | * that entity. |
||
| 3917 | * |
||
| 3918 | * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation |
||
| 3919 | * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a |
||
| 3920 | * definition. For example, given: |
||
| 3921 | * |
||
| 3922 | * \code |
||
| 3923 | * int f(int, int); |
||
| 3924 | * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); } |
||
| 3925 | * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; } |
||
| 3926 | * int f(int, int); |
||
| 3927 | * \endcode |
||
| 3928 | * |
||
| 3929 | * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the |
||
| 3930 | * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition() |
||
| 3931 | * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f" |
||
| 3932 | * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced |
||
| 3933 | * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a |
||
| 3934 | * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f" |
||
| 3935 | * declaration). |
||
| 3936 | * |
||
| 3937 | * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition, |
||
| 3938 | * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this |
||
| 3939 | * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor. |
||
| 3940 | */ |
||
| 3941 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
||
| 3942 | |||
| 3943 | /** |
||
| 3944 | * Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor |
||
| 3945 | * is also a definition of that entity. |
||
| 3946 | */ |
||
| 3947 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
||
| 3948 | |||
| 3949 | /** |
||
| 3950 | * Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor. |
||
| 3951 | * |
||
| 3952 | * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several |
||
| 3953 | * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can |
||
| 3954 | * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined: |
||
| 3955 | * |
||
| 3956 | * \code |
||
| 3957 | * struct X; |
||
| 3958 | * struct X; |
||
| 3959 | * struct X { |
||
| 3960 | * int member; |
||
| 3961 | * }; |
||
| 3962 | * \endcode |
||
| 3963 | * |
||
| 3964 | * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three |
||
| 3965 | * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying |
||
| 3966 | * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which |
||
| 3967 | * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can |
||
| 3968 | * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by |
||
| 3969 | * comparing their canonical cursors. |
||
| 3970 | * |
||
| 3971 | * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor. |
||
| 3972 | */ |
||
| 3973 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor); |
||
| 3974 | |||
| 3975 | /** |
||
| 3976 | * If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C |
||
| 3977 | * method or message expression, this returns the selector index. |
||
| 3978 | * |
||
| 3979 | * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to |
||
| 3980 | * determine if the location points to a selector identifier. |
||
| 3981 | * |
||
| 3982 | * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message |
||
| 3983 | * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1 |
||
| 3984 | * otherwise. |
||
| 3985 | */ |
||
| 3986 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor); |
||
| 3987 | |||
| 3988 | /** |
||
| 3989 | * Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C |
||
| 3990 | * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning: |
||
| 3991 | * |
||
| 3992 | * For a C++ method: the call is virtual. |
||
| 3993 | * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super' |
||
| 3994 | * or a specific class. |
||
| 3995 | * |
||
| 3996 | * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a |
||
| 3997 | * method/message, it will return zero. |
||
| 3998 | */ |
||
| 3999 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4000 | |||
| 4001 | /** |
||
| 4002 | * Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message or property |
||
| 4003 | * reference, or C++ method call, returns the CXType of the receiver. |
||
| 4004 | */ |
||
| 4005 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4006 | |||
| 4007 | /** |
||
| 4008 | * Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl. |
||
| 4009 | */ |
||
| 4010 | typedef enum { |
||
| 4011 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00, |
||
| 4012 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01, |
||
| 4013 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02, |
||
| 4014 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04, |
||
| 4015 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08, |
||
| 4016 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10, |
||
| 4017 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20, |
||
| 4018 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40, |
||
| 4019 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80, |
||
| 4020 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100, |
||
| 4021 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200, |
||
| 4022 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400, |
||
| 4023 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800, |
||
| 4024 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000 |
||
| 4025 | } CXObjCPropertyAttrKind; |
||
| 4026 | |||
| 4027 | /** |
||
| 4028 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
| 4029 | * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from |
||
| 4030 | * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind. |
||
| 4031 | * |
||
| 4032 | * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0. |
||
| 4033 | */ |
||
| 4034 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 4035 | clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C, unsigned reserved); |
||
| 4036 | |||
| 4037 | /** |
||
| 4038 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
| 4039 | * name of the method that implements the getter. |
||
| 4040 | */ |
||
| 4041 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyGetterName(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4042 | |||
| 4043 | /** |
||
| 4044 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
||
| 4045 | * name of the method that implements the setter, if any. |
||
| 4046 | */ |
||
| 4047 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertySetterName(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4048 | |||
| 4049 | /** |
||
| 4050 | * 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in |
||
| 4051 | * Objective-C method declarations. |
||
| 4052 | */ |
||
| 4053 | typedef enum { |
||
| 4054 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0, |
||
| 4055 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1, |
||
| 4056 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2, |
||
| 4057 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4, |
||
| 4058 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8, |
||
| 4059 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10, |
||
| 4060 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20 |
||
| 4061 | } CXObjCDeclQualifierKind; |
||
| 4062 | |||
| 4063 | /** |
||
| 4064 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter |
||
| 4065 | * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return |
||
| 4066 | * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from |
||
| 4067 | * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind. |
||
| 4068 | */ |
||
| 4069 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4070 | |||
| 4071 | /** |
||
| 4072 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property |
||
| 4073 | * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "\@optional". |
||
| 4074 | * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "\@required". |
||
| 4075 | */ |
||
| 4076 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4077 | |||
| 4078 | /** |
||
| 4079 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method. |
||
| 4080 | */ |
||
| 4081 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4082 | |||
| 4083 | /** |
||
| 4084 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor points to a symbol marked with |
||
| 4085 | * external_source_symbol attribute. |
||
| 4086 | * |
||
| 4087 | * \param language If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
| 4088 | * the 'language' string from the attribute. |
||
| 4089 | * |
||
| 4090 | * \param definedIn If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
| 4091 | * the 'definedIn' string from the attribute. |
||
| 4092 | * |
||
| 4093 | * \param isGenerated If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
||
| 4094 | * non-zero if the 'generated_declaration' is set in the attribute. |
||
| 4095 | */ |
||
| 4096 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isExternalSymbol(CXCursor C, |
||
| 4097 | CXString *language, |
||
| 4098 | CXString *definedIn, |
||
| 4099 | unsigned *isGenerated); |
||
| 4100 | |||
| 4101 | /** |
||
| 4102 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
||
| 4103 | * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments |
||
| 4104 | * with whitespace in between. |
||
| 4105 | */ |
||
| 4106 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4107 | |||
| 4108 | /** |
||
| 4109 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
||
| 4110 | * comment text, including comment markers. |
||
| 4111 | */ |
||
| 4112 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4113 | |||
| 4114 | /** |
||
| 4115 | * Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g., |
||
| 4116 | * declaration), return the associated \paragraph; otherwise return the |
||
| 4117 | * first paragraph. |
||
| 4118 | */ |
||
| 4119 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4120 | |||
| 4121 | /** |
||
| 4122 | * @} |
||
| 4123 | */ |
||
| 4124 | |||
| 4125 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions |
||
| 4126 | * |
||
| 4127 | * @{ |
||
| 4128 | */ |
||
| 4129 | |||
| 4130 | /** |
||
| 4131 | * Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor. |
||
| 4132 | */ |
||
| 4133 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor); |
||
| 4134 | |||
| 4135 | /** |
||
| 4136 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++ |
||
| 4137 | * constructor or destructor at the cursor. |
||
| 4138 | */ |
||
| 4139 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor); |
||
| 4140 | |||
| 4141 | /** |
||
| 4142 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the ObjC |
||
| 4143 | * class interface or implementation at the cursor. |
||
| 4144 | */ |
||
| 4145 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getObjCManglings(CXCursor); |
||
| 4146 | |||
| 4147 | /** |
||
| 4148 | * @} |
||
| 4149 | */ |
||
| 4150 | |||
| 4151 | /** |
||
| 4152 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection |
||
| 4153 | * |
||
| 4154 | * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules. |
||
| 4155 | * |
||
| 4156 | * @{ |
||
| 4157 | */ |
||
| 4158 | |||
| 4159 | typedef void *CXModule; |
||
| 4160 | |||
| 4161 | /** |
||
| 4162 | * Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module. |
||
| 4163 | */ |
||
| 4164 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4165 | |||
| 4166 | /** |
||
| 4167 | * Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one |
||
| 4168 | * exists. |
||
| 4169 | */ |
||
| 4170 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile); |
||
| 4171 | |||
| 4172 | /** |
||
| 4173 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4174 | * |
||
| 4175 | * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from. |
||
| 4176 | */ |
||
| 4177 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module); |
||
| 4178 | |||
| 4179 | /** |
||
| 4180 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4181 | * |
||
| 4182 | * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level, |
||
| 4183 | * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module. |
||
| 4184 | */ |
||
| 4185 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module); |
||
| 4186 | |||
| 4187 | /** |
||
| 4188 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4189 | * |
||
| 4190 | * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it |
||
| 4191 | * will return "vector". |
||
| 4192 | */ |
||
| 4193 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module); |
||
| 4194 | |||
| 4195 | /** |
||
| 4196 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4197 | * |
||
| 4198 | * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector". |
||
| 4199 | */ |
||
| 4200 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module); |
||
| 4201 | |||
| 4202 | /** |
||
| 4203 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4204 | * |
||
| 4205 | * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one. |
||
| 4206 | */ |
||
| 4207 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module); |
||
| 4208 | |||
| 4209 | /** |
||
| 4210 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4211 | * |
||
| 4212 | * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module. |
||
| 4213 | */ |
||
| 4214 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit, |
||
| 4215 | CXModule Module); |
||
| 4216 | |||
| 4217 | /** |
||
| 4218 | * \param Module a module object. |
||
| 4219 | * |
||
| 4220 | * \param Index top level header index (zero-based). |
||
| 4221 | * |
||
| 4222 | * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module. |
||
| 4223 | */ |
||
| 4224 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 4225 | CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit, CXModule Module, |
||
| 4226 | unsigned Index); |
||
| 4227 | |||
| 4228 | /** |
||
| 4229 | * @} |
||
| 4230 | */ |
||
| 4231 | |||
| 4232 | /** |
||
| 4233 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection |
||
| 4234 | * |
||
| 4235 | * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific |
||
| 4236 | * to C++ language features. |
||
| 4237 | * |
||
| 4238 | * @{ |
||
| 4239 | */ |
||
| 4240 | |||
| 4241 | /** |
||
| 4242 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor. |
||
| 4243 | */ |
||
| 4244 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 4245 | clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4246 | |||
| 4247 | /** |
||
| 4248 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor. |
||
| 4249 | */ |
||
| 4250 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4251 | |||
| 4252 | /** |
||
| 4253 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor. |
||
| 4254 | */ |
||
| 4255 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4256 | |||
| 4257 | /** |
||
| 4258 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor. |
||
| 4259 | */ |
||
| 4260 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4261 | |||
| 4262 | /** |
||
| 4263 | * Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'. |
||
| 4264 | */ |
||
| 4265 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4266 | |||
| 4267 | /** |
||
| 4268 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'. |
||
| 4269 | */ |
||
| 4270 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4271 | |||
| 4272 | /** |
||
| 4273 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= delete'. |
||
| 4274 | */ |
||
| 4275 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDeleted(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4276 | |||
| 4277 | /** |
||
| 4278 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
| 4279 | * pure virtual. |
||
| 4280 | */ |
||
| 4281 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4282 | |||
| 4283 | /** |
||
| 4284 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
| 4285 | * declared 'static'. |
||
| 4286 | */ |
||
| 4287 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4288 | |||
| 4289 | /** |
||
| 4290 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
| 4291 | * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from |
||
| 4292 | * one of the base classes. |
||
| 4293 | */ |
||
| 4294 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4295 | |||
| 4296 | /** |
||
| 4297 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a copy-assignment operator, |
||
| 4298 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
||
| 4299 | * |
||
| 4300 | * > A copy-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
||
| 4301 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
||
| 4302 | * > parameter of type `X`, `X&`, `const X&`, `volatile X&` or `const |
||
| 4303 | * > volatile X&`. |
||
| 4304 | * |
||
| 4305 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
||
| 4306 | * |
||
| 4307 | * class Foo { |
||
| 4308 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&); |
||
| 4309 | * }; |
||
| 4310 | * |
||
| 4311 | * Is a copy-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
||
| 4312 | * |
||
| 4313 | * class Bar { |
||
| 4314 | * bool operator=(const int&); |
||
| 4315 | * }; |
||
| 4316 | * |
||
| 4317 | * Is not. |
||
| 4318 | */ |
||
| 4319 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isCopyAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4320 | |||
| 4321 | /** |
||
| 4322 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a move-assignment operator, |
||
| 4323 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
||
| 4324 | * |
||
| 4325 | * > A move-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
||
| 4326 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
||
| 4327 | * > parameter of type `X&&`, `const X&&`, `volatile X&&` or `const |
||
| 4328 | * > volatile X&&`. |
||
| 4329 | * |
||
| 4330 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
||
| 4331 | * |
||
| 4332 | * class Foo { |
||
| 4333 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&&); |
||
| 4334 | * }; |
||
| 4335 | * |
||
| 4336 | * Is a move-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
||
| 4337 | * |
||
| 4338 | * class Bar { |
||
| 4339 | * bool operator=(const int&&); |
||
| 4340 | * }; |
||
| 4341 | * |
||
| 4342 | * Is not. |
||
| 4343 | */ |
||
| 4344 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isMoveAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4345 | |||
| 4346 | /** |
||
| 4347 | * Determine if a C++ record is abstract, i.e. whether a class or struct |
||
| 4348 | * has a pure virtual member function. |
||
| 4349 | */ |
||
| 4350 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXRecord_isAbstract(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4351 | |||
| 4352 | /** |
||
| 4353 | * Determine if an enum declaration refers to a scoped enum. |
||
| 4354 | */ |
||
| 4355 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EnumDecl_isScoped(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4356 | |||
| 4357 | /** |
||
| 4358 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
||
| 4359 | * declared 'const'. |
||
| 4360 | */ |
||
| 4361 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4362 | |||
| 4363 | /** |
||
| 4364 | * Given a cursor that represents a template, determine |
||
| 4365 | * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating |
||
| 4366 | * the template. |
||
| 4367 | * |
||
| 4368 | * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template, |
||
| 4369 | * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the |
||
| 4370 | * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is |
||
| 4371 | * declared with "struct", "class" or "union". |
||
| 4372 | * |
||
| 4373 | * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template |
||
| 4374 | * declaration. |
||
| 4375 | * |
||
| 4376 | * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated |
||
| 4377 | * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns |
||
| 4378 | * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound. |
||
| 4379 | */ |
||
| 4380 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4381 | |||
| 4382 | /** |
||
| 4383 | * Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation |
||
| 4384 | * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it |
||
| 4385 | * specializes or from which it was instantiated. |
||
| 4386 | * |
||
| 4387 | * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit |
||
| 4388 | * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template, |
||
| 4389 | * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template |
||
| 4390 | * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return |
||
| 4391 | * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was |
||
| 4392 | * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template |
||
| 4393 | * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a |
||
| 4394 | * function template specialization (including instantiations), this |
||
| 4395 | * this routine will return the specialized template. |
||
| 4396 | * |
||
| 4397 | * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or |
||
| 4398 | * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member. |
||
| 4399 | * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class |
||
| 4400 | * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that |
||
| 4401 | * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly. |
||
| 4402 | * |
||
| 4403 | * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member |
||
| 4404 | * of a template. |
||
| 4405 | * |
||
| 4406 | * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a |
||
| 4407 | * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or |
||
| 4408 | * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor. |
||
| 4409 | */ |
||
| 4410 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C); |
||
| 4411 | |||
| 4412 | /** |
||
| 4413 | * Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range |
||
| 4414 | * covering that reference. |
||
| 4415 | * |
||
| 4416 | * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or |
||
| 4417 | * an operator call. |
||
| 4418 | * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags: |
||
| 4419 | * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and |
||
| 4420 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
||
| 4421 | * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag |
||
| 4422 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is |
||
| 4423 | * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a |
||
| 4424 | * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual |
||
| 4425 | * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
||
| 4426 | * |
||
| 4427 | * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no |
||
| 4428 | * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned. |
||
| 4429 | */ |
||
| 4430 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange( |
||
| 4431 | CXCursor C, unsigned NameFlags, unsigned PieceIndex); |
||
| 4432 | |||
| 4433 | enum CXNameRefFlags { |
||
| 4434 | /** |
||
| 4435 | * Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the |
||
| 4436 | * range. |
||
| 4437 | */ |
||
| 4438 | CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1, |
||
| 4439 | |||
| 4440 | /** |
||
| 4441 | * Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>, |
||
| 4442 | * in the range. |
||
| 4443 | */ |
||
| 4444 | CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2, |
||
| 4445 | |||
| 4446 | /** |
||
| 4447 | * If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range. |
||
| 4448 | * |
||
| 4449 | * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more |
||
| 4450 | * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator: |
||
| 4451 | * \code |
||
| 4452 | * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C |
||
| 4453 | * return some_vector[1]; // C++ |
||
| 4454 | * \endcode |
||
| 4455 | */ |
||
| 4456 | CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4 |
||
| 4457 | }; |
||
| 4458 | |||
| 4459 | /** |
||
| 4460 | * @} |
||
| 4461 | */ |
||
| 4462 | |||
| 4463 | /** |
||
| 4464 | * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation |
||
| 4465 | * |
||
| 4466 | * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a |
||
| 4467 | * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to |
||
| 4468 | * their corresponding cursors. |
||
| 4469 | * |
||
| 4470 | * @{ |
||
| 4471 | */ |
||
| 4472 | |||
| 4473 | /** |
||
| 4474 | * Describes a kind of token. |
||
| 4475 | */ |
||
| 4476 | typedef enum CXTokenKind { |
||
| 4477 | /** |
||
| 4478 | * A token that contains some kind of punctuation. |
||
| 4479 | */ |
||
| 4480 | CXToken_Punctuation, |
||
| 4481 | |||
| 4482 | /** |
||
| 4483 | * A language keyword. |
||
| 4484 | */ |
||
| 4485 | CXToken_Keyword, |
||
| 4486 | |||
| 4487 | /** |
||
| 4488 | * An identifier (that is not a keyword). |
||
| 4489 | */ |
||
| 4490 | CXToken_Identifier, |
||
| 4491 | |||
| 4492 | /** |
||
| 4493 | * A numeric, string, or character literal. |
||
| 4494 | */ |
||
| 4495 | CXToken_Literal, |
||
| 4496 | |||
| 4497 | /** |
||
| 4498 | * A comment. |
||
| 4499 | */ |
||
| 4500 | CXToken_Comment |
||
| 4501 | } CXTokenKind; |
||
| 4502 | |||
| 4503 | /** |
||
| 4504 | * Describes a single preprocessing token. |
||
| 4505 | */ |
||
| 4506 | typedef struct { |
||
| 4507 | unsigned int_data[4]; |
||
| 4508 | void *ptr_data; |
||
| 4509 | } CXToken; |
||
| 4510 | |||
| 4511 | /** |
||
| 4512 | * Get the raw lexical token starting with the given location. |
||
| 4513 | * |
||
| 4514 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
||
| 4515 | * |
||
| 4516 | * \param Location the source location with which the token starts. |
||
| 4517 | * |
||
| 4518 | * \returns The token starting with the given location or NULL if no such token |
||
| 4519 | * exist. The returned pointer must be freed with clang_disposeTokens before the |
||
| 4520 | * translation unit is destroyed. |
||
| 4521 | */ |
||
| 4522 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXToken *clang_getToken(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
||
| 4523 | CXSourceLocation Location); |
||
| 4524 | |||
| 4525 | /** |
||
| 4526 | * Determine the kind of the given token. |
||
| 4527 | */ |
||
| 4528 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken); |
||
| 4529 | |||
| 4530 | /** |
||
| 4531 | * Determine the spelling of the given token. |
||
| 4532 | * |
||
| 4533 | * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g., |
||
| 4534 | * the text of an identifier or keyword. |
||
| 4535 | */ |
||
| 4536 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
||
| 4537 | |||
| 4538 | /** |
||
| 4539 | * Retrieve the source location of the given token. |
||
| 4540 | */ |
||
| 4541 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit, |
||
| 4542 | CXToken); |
||
| 4543 | |||
| 4544 | /** |
||
| 4545 | * Retrieve a source range that covers the given token. |
||
| 4546 | */ |
||
| 4547 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
||
| 4548 | |||
| 4549 | /** |
||
| 4550 | * Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw |
||
| 4551 | * lexical tokens. |
||
| 4552 | * |
||
| 4553 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
||
| 4554 | * |
||
| 4555 | * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the |
||
| 4556 | * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range, |
||
| 4557 | * |
||
| 4558 | * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens |
||
| 4559 | * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be |
||
| 4560 | * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed. |
||
| 4561 | * |
||
| 4562 | * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens |
||
| 4563 | * array. |
||
| 4564 | * |
||
| 4565 | */ |
||
| 4566 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range, |
||
| 4567 | CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens); |
||
| 4568 | |||
| 4569 | /** |
||
| 4570 | * Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token |
||
| 4571 | * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree. |
||
| 4572 | * |
||
| 4573 | * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking |
||
| 4574 | * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the |
||
| 4575 | * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those |
||
| 4576 | * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are |
||
| 4577 | * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x), |
||
| 4578 | * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors: |
||
| 4579 | * |
||
| 4580 | * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'. |
||
| 4581 | * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'. |
||
| 4582 | * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'. |
||
| 4583 | * |
||
| 4584 | * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the |
||
| 4585 | * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function |
||
| 4586 | * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small |
||
| 4587 | * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is |
||
| 4588 | * not provided as an annotation. |
||
| 4589 | * |
||
| 4590 | * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens. |
||
| 4591 | * |
||
| 4592 | * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate. |
||
| 4593 | * |
||
| 4594 | * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens. |
||
| 4595 | * |
||
| 4596 | * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be |
||
| 4597 | * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token. |
||
| 4598 | */ |
||
| 4599 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
||
| 4600 | unsigned NumTokens, CXCursor *Cursors); |
||
| 4601 | |||
| 4602 | /** |
||
| 4603 | * Free the given set of tokens. |
||
| 4604 | */ |
||
| 4605 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
||
| 4606 | unsigned NumTokens); |
||
| 4607 | |||
| 4608 | /** |
||
| 4609 | * @} |
||
| 4610 | */ |
||
| 4611 | |||
| 4612 | /** |
||
| 4613 | * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities |
||
| 4614 | * |
||
| 4615 | * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not |
||
| 4616 | * be relied upon. |
||
| 4617 | * |
||
| 4618 | * @{ |
||
| 4619 | */ |
||
| 4620 | |||
| 4621 | /* for debug/testing */ |
||
| 4622 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind); |
||
| 4623 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent( |
||
| 4624 | CXCursor, const char **startBuf, const char **endBuf, unsigned *startLine, |
||
| 4625 | unsigned *startColumn, unsigned *endLine, unsigned *endColumn); |
||
| 4626 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void); |
||
| 4627 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void *), void *user_data, |
||
| 4628 | unsigned stack_size); |
||
| 4629 | |||
| 4630 | /** |
||
| 4631 | * @} |
||
| 4632 | */ |
||
| 4633 | |||
| 4634 | /** |
||
| 4635 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion |
||
| 4636 | * |
||
| 4637 | * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with |
||
| 4638 | * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting |
||
| 4639 | * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to |
||
| 4640 | * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and |
||
| 4641 | * routines provide support for code completion. |
||
| 4642 | * |
||
| 4643 | * @{ |
||
| 4644 | */ |
||
| 4645 | |||
| 4646 | /** |
||
| 4647 | * A semantic string that describes a code-completion result. |
||
| 4648 | * |
||
| 4649 | * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion |
||
| 4650 | * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the |
||
| 4651 | * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected. |
||
| 4652 | * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which |
||
| 4653 | * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g., |
||
| 4654 | * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of |
||
| 4655 | * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace |
||
| 4656 | * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a |
||
| 4657 | * description of the different kinds of chunks. |
||
| 4658 | */ |
||
| 4659 | typedef void *CXCompletionString; |
||
| 4660 | |||
| 4661 | /** |
||
| 4662 | * A single result of code completion. |
||
| 4663 | */ |
||
| 4664 | typedef struct { |
||
| 4665 | /** |
||
| 4666 | * The kind of entity that this completion refers to. |
||
| 4667 | * |
||
| 4668 | * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the |
||
| 4669 | * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is |
||
| 4670 | * referring to. |
||
| 4671 | * |
||
| 4672 | * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow |
||
| 4673 | * the client to extract additional information from declaration. |
||
| 4674 | */ |
||
| 4675 | enum CXCursorKind CursorKind; |
||
| 4676 | |||
| 4677 | /** |
||
| 4678 | * The code-completion string that describes how to insert this |
||
| 4679 | * code-completion result into the editing buffer. |
||
| 4680 | */ |
||
| 4681 | CXCompletionString CompletionString; |
||
| 4682 | } CXCompletionResult; |
||
| 4683 | |||
| 4684 | /** |
||
| 4685 | * Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string. |
||
| 4686 | * |
||
| 4687 | * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is |
||
| 4688 | * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text |
||
| 4689 | * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string. |
||
| 4690 | */ |
||
| 4691 | enum CXCompletionChunkKind { |
||
| 4692 | /** |
||
| 4693 | * A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that |
||
| 4694 | * could be a part of the template (but is not required). |
||
| 4695 | * |
||
| 4696 | * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion |
||
| 4697 | * string for its representation, which is accessible via |
||
| 4698 | * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string |
||
| 4699 | * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional. |
||
| 4700 | * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for |
||
| 4701 | * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given: |
||
| 4702 | * |
||
| 4703 | * \code |
||
| 4704 | * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828); |
||
| 4705 | * \endcode |
||
| 4706 | * |
||
| 4707 | * The code-completion string for this function would contain: |
||
| 4708 | * - a TypedText chunk for "f". |
||
| 4709 | * - a LeftParen chunk for "(". |
||
| 4710 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x" |
||
| 4711 | * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g., |
||
| 4712 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
||
| 4713 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y" |
||
| 4714 | * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument: |
||
| 4715 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
||
| 4716 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z" |
||
| 4717 | * - a RightParen chunk for ")" |
||
| 4718 | * |
||
| 4719 | * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are: |
||
| 4720 | * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
||
| 4721 | * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x"). |
||
| 4722 | * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
||
| 4723 | * function "f" would have all of the parameters. |
||
| 4724 | */ |
||
| 4725 | CXCompletionChunk_Optional, |
||
| 4726 | /** |
||
| 4727 | * Text that a user would be expected to type to get this |
||
| 4728 | * code-completion result. |
||
| 4729 | * |
||
| 4730 | * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which |
||
| 4731 | * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a |
||
| 4732 | * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are |
||
| 4733 | * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this |
||
| 4734 | * chunk. |
||
| 4735 | */ |
||
| 4736 | CXCompletionChunk_TypedText, |
||
| 4737 | /** |
||
| 4738 | * Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result. |
||
| 4739 | * |
||
| 4740 | * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be |
||
| 4741 | * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result |
||
| 4742 | * be selected. |
||
| 4743 | */ |
||
| 4744 | CXCompletionChunk_Text, |
||
| 4745 | /** |
||
| 4746 | * Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user. |
||
| 4747 | * |
||
| 4748 | * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text |
||
| 4749 | * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark |
||
| 4750 | * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the |
||
| 4751 | * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual |
||
| 4752 | * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before |
||
| 4753 | * the user replaces the placeholder with real code. |
||
| 4754 | */ |
||
| 4755 | CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder, |
||
| 4756 | /** |
||
| 4757 | * Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as |
||
| 4758 | * part of the template. |
||
| 4759 | * |
||
| 4760 | * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to |
||
| 4761 | * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the |
||
| 4762 | * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted |
||
| 4763 | * by code completion. |
||
| 4764 | */ |
||
| 4765 | CXCompletionChunk_Informative, |
||
| 4766 | /** |
||
| 4767 | * Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is |
||
| 4768 | * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization. |
||
| 4769 | * |
||
| 4770 | * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing |
||
| 4771 | * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the |
||
| 4772 | * code-completion point. For example, given a function |
||
| 4773 | * |
||
| 4774 | * \code |
||
| 4775 | * int add(int x, int y); |
||
| 4776 | * \endcode |
||
| 4777 | * |
||
| 4778 | * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the |
||
| 4779 | * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk |
||
| 4780 | * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that |
||
| 4781 | * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion |
||
| 4782 | * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a |
||
| 4783 | * "current parameter" chunk to "int y". |
||
| 4784 | */ |
||
| 4785 | CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter, |
||
| 4786 | /** |
||
| 4787 | * A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or |
||
| 4788 | * signal the beginning of a function parameter list. |
||
| 4789 | */ |
||
| 4790 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen, |
||
| 4791 | /** |
||
| 4792 | * A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or |
||
| 4793 | * signal the end of a function parameter list. |
||
| 4794 | */ |
||
| 4795 | CXCompletionChunk_RightParen, |
||
| 4796 | /** |
||
| 4797 | * A left bracket ('['). |
||
| 4798 | */ |
||
| 4799 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket, |
||
| 4800 | /** |
||
| 4801 | * A right bracket (']'). |
||
| 4802 | */ |
||
| 4803 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket, |
||
| 4804 | /** |
||
| 4805 | * A left brace ('{'). |
||
| 4806 | */ |
||
| 4807 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace, |
||
| 4808 | /** |
||
| 4809 | * A right brace ('}'). |
||
| 4810 | */ |
||
| 4811 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace, |
||
| 4812 | /** |
||
| 4813 | * A left angle bracket ('<'). |
||
| 4814 | */ |
||
| 4815 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle, |
||
| 4816 | /** |
||
| 4817 | * A right angle bracket ('>'). |
||
| 4818 | */ |
||
| 4819 | CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle, |
||
| 4820 | /** |
||
| 4821 | * A comma separator (','). |
||
| 4822 | */ |
||
| 4823 | CXCompletionChunk_Comma, |
||
| 4824 | /** |
||
| 4825 | * Text that specifies the result type of a given result. |
||
| 4826 | * |
||
| 4827 | * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into |
||
| 4828 | * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an |
||
| 4829 | * expression using the given completion string would have. |
||
| 4830 | */ |
||
| 4831 | CXCompletionChunk_ResultType, |
||
| 4832 | /** |
||
| 4833 | * A colon (':'). |
||
| 4834 | */ |
||
| 4835 | CXCompletionChunk_Colon, |
||
| 4836 | /** |
||
| 4837 | * A semicolon (';'). |
||
| 4838 | */ |
||
| 4839 | CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon, |
||
| 4840 | /** |
||
| 4841 | * An '=' sign. |
||
| 4842 | */ |
||
| 4843 | CXCompletionChunk_Equal, |
||
| 4844 | /** |
||
| 4845 | * Horizontal space (' '). |
||
| 4846 | */ |
||
| 4847 | CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace, |
||
| 4848 | /** |
||
| 4849 | * Vertical space ('\\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to |
||
| 4850 | * perform indentation. |
||
| 4851 | */ |
||
| 4852 | CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace |
||
| 4853 | }; |
||
| 4854 | |||
| 4855 | /** |
||
| 4856 | * Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string. |
||
| 4857 | * |
||
| 4858 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
| 4859 | * |
||
| 4860 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
| 4861 | * |
||
| 4862 | * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number. |
||
| 4863 | */ |
||
| 4864 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind |
||
| 4865 | clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string, |
||
| 4866 | unsigned chunk_number); |
||
| 4867 | |||
| 4868 | /** |
||
| 4869 | * Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a |
||
| 4870 | * completion string. |
||
| 4871 | * |
||
| 4872 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
| 4873 | * |
||
| 4874 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
| 4875 | * |
||
| 4876 | * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number. |
||
| 4877 | */ |
||
| 4878 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionChunkText( |
||
| 4879 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
||
| 4880 | |||
| 4881 | /** |
||
| 4882 | * Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk |
||
| 4883 | * within a completion string. |
||
| 4884 | * |
||
| 4885 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
| 4886 | * |
||
| 4887 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
||
| 4888 | * |
||
| 4889 | * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index |
||
| 4890 | * \c chunk_number. |
||
| 4891 | */ |
||
| 4892 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString( |
||
| 4893 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
||
| 4894 | |||
| 4895 | /** |
||
| 4896 | * Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string. |
||
| 4897 | */ |
||
| 4898 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 4899 | clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
| 4900 | |||
| 4901 | /** |
||
| 4902 | * Determine the priority of this code completion. |
||
| 4903 | * |
||
| 4904 | * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this |
||
| 4905 | * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The |
||
| 4906 | * priority is selected by various internal heuristics. |
||
| 4907 | * |
||
| 4908 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
||
| 4909 | * |
||
| 4910 | * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate |
||
| 4911 | * higher-priority (more likely) completions. |
||
| 4912 | */ |
||
| 4913 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 4914 | clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
| 4915 | |||
| 4916 | /** |
||
| 4917 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion |
||
| 4918 | * string refers to. |
||
| 4919 | * |
||
| 4920 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
||
| 4921 | * |
||
| 4922 | * \returns The availability of the completion string. |
||
| 4923 | */ |
||
| 4924 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
||
| 4925 | clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
| 4926 | |||
| 4927 | /** |
||
| 4928 | * Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given |
||
| 4929 | * completion string. |
||
| 4930 | * |
||
| 4931 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
| 4932 | * |
||
| 4933 | * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion |
||
| 4934 | * string. |
||
| 4935 | */ |
||
| 4936 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 4937 | clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
| 4938 | |||
| 4939 | /** |
||
| 4940 | * Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string. |
||
| 4941 | * |
||
| 4942 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
||
| 4943 | * |
||
| 4944 | * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the |
||
| 4945 | * completion string. |
||
| 4946 | * |
||
| 4947 | * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index |
||
| 4948 | * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available. |
||
| 4949 | */ |
||
| 4950 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionAnnotation( |
||
| 4951 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned annotation_number); |
||
| 4952 | |||
| 4953 | /** |
||
| 4954 | * Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string. |
||
| 4955 | * |
||
| 4956 | * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of |
||
| 4957 | * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example, |
||
| 4958 | * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class |
||
| 4959 | * or protocol as its context. |
||
| 4960 | * |
||
| 4961 | * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is |
||
| 4962 | * being queried. |
||
| 4963 | * |
||
| 4964 | * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL. |
||
| 4965 | * |
||
| 4966 | * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if |
||
| 4967 | * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class. |
||
| 4968 | */ |
||
| 4969 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionParent( |
||
| 4970 | CXCompletionString completion_string, enum CXCursorKind *kind); |
||
| 4971 | |||
| 4972 | /** |
||
| 4973 | * Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration |
||
| 4974 | * that corresponds to the given completion string. |
||
| 4975 | */ |
||
| 4976 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
||
| 4977 | clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
||
| 4978 | |||
| 4979 | /** |
||
| 4980 | * Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro |
||
| 4981 | * definition cursor. |
||
| 4982 | * |
||
| 4983 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
||
| 4984 | * |
||
| 4985 | * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro |
||
| 4986 | * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors. |
||
| 4987 | */ |
||
| 4988 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString |
||
| 4989 | clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor); |
||
| 4990 | |||
| 4991 | /** |
||
| 4992 | * Contains the results of code-completion. |
||
| 4993 | * |
||
| 4994 | * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as |
||
| 4995 | * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by |
||
| 4996 | * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults. |
||
| 4997 | */ |
||
| 4998 | typedef struct { |
||
| 4999 | /** |
||
| 5000 | * The code-completion results. |
||
| 5001 | */ |
||
| 5002 | CXCompletionResult *Results; |
||
| 5003 | |||
| 5004 | /** |
||
| 5005 | * The number of code-completion results stored in the |
||
| 5006 | * \c Results array. |
||
| 5007 | */ |
||
| 5008 | unsigned NumResults; |
||
| 5009 | } CXCodeCompleteResults; |
||
| 5010 | |||
| 5011 | /** |
||
| 5012 | * Retrieve the number of fix-its for the given completion index. |
||
| 5013 | * |
||
| 5014 | * Calling this makes sense only if CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts |
||
| 5015 | * option was set. |
||
| 5016 | * |
||
| 5017 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
||
| 5018 | * |
||
| 5019 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
||
| 5020 | * |
||
| 5021 | * \return The number of fix-its which must be applied before the completion at |
||
| 5022 | * completion_index can be applied |
||
| 5023 | */ |
||
| 5024 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
||
| 5025 | clang_getCompletionNumFixIts(CXCodeCompleteResults *results, |
||
| 5026 | unsigned completion_index); |
||
| 5027 | |||
| 5028 | /** |
||
| 5029 | * Fix-its that *must* be applied before inserting the text for the |
||
| 5030 | * corresponding completion. |
||
| 5031 | * |
||
| 5032 | * By default, clang_codeCompleteAt() only returns completions with empty |
||
| 5033 | * fix-its. Extra completions with non-empty fix-its should be explicitly |
||
| 5034 | * requested by setting CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts. |
||
| 5035 | * |
||
| 5036 | * For the clients to be able to compute position of the cursor after applying |
||
| 5037 | * fix-its, the following conditions are guaranteed to hold for |
||
| 5038 | * replacement_range of the stored fix-its: |
||
| 5039 | * - Ranges in the fix-its are guaranteed to never contain the completion |
||
| 5040 | * point (or identifier under completion point, if any) inside them, except |
||
| 5041 | * at the start or at the end of the range. |
||
| 5042 | * - If a fix-it range starts or ends with completion point (or starts or |
||
| 5043 | * ends after the identifier under completion point), it will contain at |
||
| 5044 | * least one character. It allows to unambiguously recompute completion |
||
| 5045 | * point after applying the fix-it. |
||
| 5046 | * |
||
| 5047 | * The intuition is that provided fix-its change code around the identifier we |
||
| 5048 | * complete, but are not allowed to touch the identifier itself or the |
||
| 5049 | * completion point. One example of completions with corrections are the ones |
||
| 5050 | * replacing '.' with '->' and vice versa: |
||
| 5051 | * |
||
| 5052 | * std::unique_ptr<std::vector<int>> vec_ptr; |
||
| 5053 | * In 'vec_ptr.^', one of the completions is 'push_back', it requires |
||
| 5054 | * replacing '.' with '->'. |
||
| 5055 | * In 'vec_ptr->^', one of the completions is 'release', it requires |
||
| 5056 | * replacing '->' with '.'. |
||
| 5057 | * |
||
| 5058 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
||
| 5059 | * |
||
| 5060 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
||
| 5061 | * |
||
| 5062 | * \param fixit_index The index of the fix-it for the completion at |
||
| 5063 | * completion_index |
||
| 5064 | * |
||
| 5065 | * \param replacement_range The fix-it range that must be replaced before the |
||
| 5066 | * completion at completion_index can be applied |
||
| 5067 | * |
||
| 5068 | * \returns The fix-it string that must replace the code at replacement_range |
||
| 5069 | * before the completion at completion_index can be applied |
||
| 5070 | */ |
||
| 5071 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionFixIt( |
||
| 5072 | CXCodeCompleteResults *results, unsigned completion_index, |
||
| 5073 | unsigned fixit_index, CXSourceRange *replacement_range); |
||
| 5074 | |||
| 5075 | /** |
||
| 5076 | * Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to |
||
| 5077 | * modify its behavior. |
||
| 5078 | * |
||
| 5079 | * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to |
||
| 5080 | * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
||
| 5081 | */ |
||
| 5082 | enum CXCodeComplete_Flags { |
||
| 5083 | /** |
||
| 5084 | * Whether to include macros within the set of code |
||
| 5085 | * completions returned. |
||
| 5086 | */ |
||
| 5087 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01, |
||
| 5088 | |||
| 5089 | /** |
||
| 5090 | * Whether to include code patterns for language constructs |
||
| 5091 | * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops. |
||
| 5092 | */ |
||
| 5093 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02, |
||
| 5094 | |||
| 5095 | /** |
||
| 5096 | * Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code |
||
| 5097 | * completions returned. |
||
| 5098 | */ |
||
| 5099 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04, |
||
| 5100 | |||
| 5101 | /** |
||
| 5102 | * Whether to speed up completion by omitting top- or namespace-level entities |
||
| 5103 | * defined in the preamble. There's no guarantee any particular entity is |
||
| 5104 | * omitted. This may be useful if the headers are indexed externally. |
||
| 5105 | */ |
||
| 5106 | CXCodeComplete_SkipPreamble = 0x08, |
||
| 5107 | |||
| 5108 | /** |
||
| 5109 | * Whether to include completions with small |
||
| 5110 | * fix-its, e.g. change '.' to '->' on member access, etc. |
||
| 5111 | */ |
||
| 5112 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts = 0x10 |
||
| 5113 | }; |
||
| 5114 | |||
| 5115 | /** |
||
| 5116 | * Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring. |
||
| 5117 | * |
||
| 5118 | * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple |
||
| 5119 | * contexts are occurring simultaneously. |
||
| 5120 | */ |
||
| 5121 | enum CXCompletionContext { |
||
| 5122 | /** |
||
| 5123 | * The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results |
||
| 5124 | * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.) |
||
| 5125 | */ |
||
| 5126 | CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0, |
||
| 5127 | |||
| 5128 | /** |
||
| 5129 | * Completions for any possible type should be included in the results. |
||
| 5130 | */ |
||
| 5131 | CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0, |
||
| 5132 | |||
| 5133 | /** |
||
| 5134 | * Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.) |
||
| 5135 | * should be included in the results. |
||
| 5136 | */ |
||
| 5137 | CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1, |
||
| 5138 | /** |
||
| 5139 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should |
||
| 5140 | * be included in the results. |
||
| 5141 | */ |
||
| 5142 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2, |
||
| 5143 | /** |
||
| 5144 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector |
||
| 5145 | * should be included in the results. |
||
| 5146 | */ |
||
| 5147 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3, |
||
| 5148 | /** |
||
| 5149 | * Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be |
||
| 5150 | * included in the results. |
||
| 5151 | */ |
||
| 5152 | CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4, |
||
| 5153 | |||
| 5154 | /** |
||
| 5155 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot |
||
| 5156 | * operator should be included in the results. |
||
| 5157 | */ |
||
| 5158 | CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5, |
||
| 5159 | /** |
||
| 5160 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow |
||
| 5161 | * operator should be included in the results. |
||
| 5162 | */ |
||
| 5163 | CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6, |
||
| 5164 | /** |
||
| 5165 | * Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed |
||
| 5166 | * using the dot operator should be included in the results. |
||
| 5167 | */ |
||
| 5168 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7, |
||
| 5169 | |||
| 5170 | /** |
||
| 5171 | * Completions for enum tags should be included in the results. |
||
| 5172 | */ |
||
| 5173 | CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8, |
||
| 5174 | /** |
||
| 5175 | * Completions for union tags should be included in the results. |
||
| 5176 | */ |
||
| 5177 | CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9, |
||
| 5178 | /** |
||
| 5179 | * Completions for struct tags should be included in the results. |
||
| 5180 | */ |
||
| 5181 | CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10, |
||
| 5182 | |||
| 5183 | /** |
||
| 5184 | * Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results. |
||
| 5185 | */ |
||
| 5186 | CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11, |
||
| 5187 | /** |
||
| 5188 | * Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be |
||
| 5189 | * included in the results. |
||
| 5190 | */ |
||
| 5191 | CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12, |
||
| 5192 | /** |
||
| 5193 | * Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in |
||
| 5194 | * the results. |
||
| 5195 | */ |
||
| 5196 | CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13, |
||
| 5197 | |||
| 5198 | /** |
||
| 5199 | * Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included |
||
| 5200 | * in the results. |
||
| 5201 | */ |
||
| 5202 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14, |
||
| 5203 | /** |
||
| 5204 | * Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in |
||
| 5205 | * the results. |
||
| 5206 | */ |
||
| 5207 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15, |
||
| 5208 | /** |
||
| 5209 | * Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in |
||
| 5210 | * the results. |
||
| 5211 | */ |
||
| 5212 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16, |
||
| 5213 | /** |
||
| 5214 | * Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included |
||
| 5215 | * in the results. |
||
| 5216 | */ |
||
| 5217 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17, |
||
| 5218 | /** |
||
| 5219 | * Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in |
||
| 5220 | * the results. |
||
| 5221 | */ |
||
| 5222 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18, |
||
| 5223 | /** |
||
| 5224 | * Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in |
||
| 5225 | * the results. |
||
| 5226 | */ |
||
| 5227 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19, |
||
| 5228 | |||
| 5229 | /** |
||
| 5230 | * Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in |
||
| 5231 | * the results. |
||
| 5232 | */ |
||
| 5233 | CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20, |
||
| 5234 | |||
| 5235 | /** |
||
| 5236 | * Natural language completions should be included in the results. |
||
| 5237 | */ |
||
| 5238 | CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21, |
||
| 5239 | |||
| 5240 | /** |
||
| 5241 | * #include file completions should be included in the results. |
||
| 5242 | */ |
||
| 5243 | CXCompletionContext_IncludedFile = 1 << 22, |
||
| 5244 | |||
| 5245 | /** |
||
| 5246 | * The current context is unknown, so set all contexts. |
||
| 5247 | */ |
||
| 5248 | CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 23) - 1) |
||
| 5249 | }; |
||
| 5250 | |||
| 5251 | /** |
||
| 5252 | * Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be |
||
| 5253 | * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
||
| 5254 | */ |
||
| 5255 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void); |
||
| 5256 | |||
| 5257 | /** |
||
| 5258 | * Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit. |
||
| 5259 | * |
||
| 5260 | * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and |
||
| 5261 | * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential |
||
| 5262 | * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model |
||
| 5263 | * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file, |
||
| 5264 | * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has |
||
| 5265 | * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed |
||
| 5266 | * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the |
||
| 5267 | * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of |
||
| 5268 | * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are |
||
| 5269 | * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure. |
||
| 5270 | * |
||
| 5271 | * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the |
||
| 5272 | * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the |
||
| 5273 | * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p |
||
| 5274 | * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then |
||
| 5275 | * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is after the ">", |
||
| 5276 | * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that |
||
| 5277 | * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the |
||
| 5278 | * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results |
||
| 5279 | * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for |
||
| 5280 | * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after |
||
| 5281 | * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the |
||
| 5282 | * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only |
||
| 5283 | * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface |
||
| 5284 | * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion |
||
| 5285 | * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must |
||
| 5286 | * have a lower latency. |
||
| 5287 | * |
||
| 5288 | * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should |
||
| 5289 | * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be |
||
| 5290 | * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may |
||
| 5291 | * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the |
||
| 5292 | * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation. |
||
| 5293 | * |
||
| 5294 | * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code |
||
| 5295 | * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file |
||
| 5296 | * included in the translation unit. |
||
| 5297 | * |
||
| 5298 | * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur. |
||
| 5299 | * |
||
| 5300 | * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur. |
||
| 5301 | * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that |
||
| 5302 | * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token. |
||
| 5303 | * |
||
| 5304 | * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk |
||
| 5305 | * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the |
||
| 5306 | * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as |
||
| 5307 | * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the |
||
| 5308 | * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to |
||
| 5309 | * this function returns. |
||
| 5310 | * |
||
| 5311 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
||
| 5312 | * unsaved_files. |
||
| 5313 | * |
||
| 5314 | * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code |
||
| 5315 | * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the |
||
| 5316 | * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The |
||
| 5317 | * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set |
||
| 5318 | * of code-completion options. |
||
| 5319 | * |
||
| 5320 | * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure |
||
| 5321 | * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be |
||
| 5322 | * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code |
||
| 5323 | * completion fails, returns NULL. |
||
| 5324 | */ |
||
| 5325 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5326 | CXCodeCompleteResults * |
||
| 5327 | clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU, const char *complete_filename, |
||
| 5328 | unsigned complete_line, unsigned complete_column, |
||
| 5329 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
| 5330 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, unsigned options); |
||
| 5331 | |||
| 5332 | /** |
||
| 5333 | * Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical |
||
| 5334 | * order. |
||
| 5335 | * |
||
| 5336 | * \param Results The set of results to sort. |
||
| 5337 | * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results. |
||
| 5338 | */ |
||
| 5339 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5340 | void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results, |
||
| 5341 | unsigned NumResults); |
||
| 5342 | |||
| 5343 | /** |
||
| 5344 | * Free the given set of code-completion results. |
||
| 5345 | */ |
||
| 5346 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5347 | void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
| 5348 | |||
| 5349 | /** |
||
| 5350 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the |
||
| 5351 | * location where code completion was performed. |
||
| 5352 | */ |
||
| 5353 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5354 | unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
| 5355 | |||
| 5356 | /** |
||
| 5357 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion. |
||
| 5358 | * |
||
| 5359 | * \param Results the code completion results to query. |
||
| 5360 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
||
| 5361 | * |
||
| 5362 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
||
| 5363 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
||
| 5364 | */ |
||
| 5365 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5366 | CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
||
| 5367 | unsigned Index); |
||
| 5368 | |||
| 5369 | /** |
||
| 5370 | * Determines what completions are appropriate for the context |
||
| 5371 | * the given code completion. |
||
| 5372 | * |
||
| 5373 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
| 5374 | * |
||
| 5375 | * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use |
||
| 5376 | * along with the given code completion results. |
||
| 5377 | */ |
||
| 5378 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5379 | unsigned long long |
||
| 5380 | clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
| 5381 | |||
| 5382 | /** |
||
| 5383 | * Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code |
||
| 5384 | * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for |
||
| 5385 | * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C |
||
| 5386 | * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return |
||
| 5387 | * CXCursor_InvalidCode. |
||
| 5388 | * |
||
| 5389 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
| 5390 | * |
||
| 5391 | * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete |
||
| 5392 | * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete |
||
| 5393 | * information, this value will be true. |
||
| 5394 | * |
||
| 5395 | * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a |
||
| 5396 | * container |
||
| 5397 | */ |
||
| 5398 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5399 | enum CXCursorKind |
||
| 5400 | clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
||
| 5401 | unsigned *IsIncomplete); |
||
| 5402 | |||
| 5403 | /** |
||
| 5404 | * Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion |
||
| 5405 | * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this |
||
| 5406 | * function will return the empty string. |
||
| 5407 | * |
||
| 5408 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
| 5409 | * |
||
| 5410 | * \returns the USR for the container |
||
| 5411 | */ |
||
| 5412 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5413 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
| 5414 | |||
| 5415 | /** |
||
| 5416 | * Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message |
||
| 5417 | * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a |
||
| 5418 | * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and |
||
| 5419 | * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage. |
||
| 5420 | * |
||
| 5421 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
||
| 5422 | * |
||
| 5423 | * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far |
||
| 5424 | * for an Objective-C message send. |
||
| 5425 | */ |
||
| 5426 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5427 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
||
| 5428 | |||
| 5429 | /** |
||
| 5430 | * @} |
||
| 5431 | */ |
||
| 5432 | |||
| 5433 | /** |
||
| 5434 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions |
||
| 5435 | * |
||
| 5436 | * @{ |
||
| 5437 | */ |
||
| 5438 | |||
| 5439 | /** |
||
| 5440 | * Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not |
||
| 5441 | * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable). |
||
| 5442 | */ |
||
| 5443 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void); |
||
| 5444 | |||
| 5445 | /** |
||
| 5446 | * Enable/disable crash recovery. |
||
| 5447 | * |
||
| 5448 | * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero |
||
| 5449 | * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it. |
||
| 5450 | */ |
||
| 5451 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled); |
||
| 5452 | |||
| 5453 | /** |
||
| 5454 | * Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit |
||
| 5455 | * (used with clang_getInclusions()). |
||
| 5456 | * |
||
| 5457 | * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each |
||
| 5458 | * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within |
||
| 5459 | * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and |
||
| 5460 | * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The |
||
| 5461 | * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example, |
||
| 5462 | * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'. |
||
| 5463 | */ |
||
| 5464 | typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file, |
||
| 5465 | CXSourceLocation *inclusion_stack, |
||
| 5466 | unsigned include_len, |
||
| 5467 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 5468 | |||
| 5469 | /** |
||
| 5470 | * Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit. |
||
| 5471 | * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included |
||
| 5472 | * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one |
||
| 5473 | * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself). |
||
| 5474 | */ |
||
| 5475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
||
| 5476 | CXInclusionVisitor visitor, |
||
| 5477 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 5478 | |||
| 5479 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5480 | CXEval_Int = 1, |
||
| 5481 | CXEval_Float = 2, |
||
| 5482 | CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3, |
||
| 5483 | CXEval_StrLiteral = 4, |
||
| 5484 | CXEval_CFStr = 5, |
||
| 5485 | CXEval_Other = 6, |
||
| 5486 | |||
| 5487 | CXEval_UnExposed = 0 |
||
| 5488 | |||
| 5489 | } CXEvalResultKind; |
||
| 5490 | |||
| 5491 | /** |
||
| 5492 | * Evaluation result of a cursor |
||
| 5493 | */ |
||
| 5494 | typedef void *CXEvalResult; |
||
| 5495 | |||
| 5496 | /** |
||
| 5497 | * If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the |
||
| 5498 | * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer, |
||
| 5499 | * into its corresponding type. |
||
| 5500 | * If it's an expression, tries to evaluate the expression. |
||
| 5501 | */ |
||
| 5502 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C); |
||
| 5503 | |||
| 5504 | /** |
||
| 5505 | * Returns the kind of the evaluated result. |
||
| 5506 | */ |
||
| 5507 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5508 | |||
| 5509 | /** |
||
| 5510 | * Returns the evaluation result as integer if the |
||
| 5511 | * kind is Int. |
||
| 5512 | */ |
||
| 5513 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5514 | |||
| 5515 | /** |
||
| 5516 | * Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the |
||
| 5517 | * kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is |
||
| 5518 | * returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt. |
||
| 5519 | */ |
||
| 5520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5521 | |||
| 5522 | /** |
||
| 5523 | * Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation |
||
| 5524 | * result resulted in an unsigned integer. |
||
| 5525 | */ |
||
| 5526 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5527 | |||
| 5528 | /** |
||
| 5529 | * Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if |
||
| 5530 | * the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero. |
||
| 5531 | */ |
||
| 5532 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
||
| 5533 | clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5534 | |||
| 5535 | /** |
||
| 5536 | * Returns the evaluation result as double if the |
||
| 5537 | * kind is double. |
||
| 5538 | */ |
||
| 5539 | CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5540 | |||
| 5541 | /** |
||
| 5542 | * Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the |
||
| 5543 | * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer, |
||
| 5544 | * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned |
||
| 5545 | * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate. |
||
| 5546 | */ |
||
| 5547 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5548 | |||
| 5549 | /** |
||
| 5550 | * Disposes the created Eval memory. |
||
| 5551 | */ |
||
| 5552 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E); |
||
| 5553 | /** |
||
| 5554 | * @} |
||
| 5555 | */ |
||
| 5556 | |||
| 5557 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions |
||
| 5558 | * |
||
| 5559 | * @{ |
||
| 5560 | */ |
||
| 5561 | |||
| 5562 | /** |
||
| 5563 | * A remapping of original source files and their translated files. |
||
| 5564 | */ |
||
| 5565 | typedef void *CXRemapping; |
||
| 5566 | |||
| 5567 | /** |
||
| 5568 | * Retrieve a remapping. |
||
| 5569 | * |
||
| 5570 | * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings. |
||
| 5571 | * |
||
| 5572 | * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed |
||
| 5573 | * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred. |
||
| 5574 | */ |
||
| 5575 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path); |
||
| 5576 | |||
| 5577 | /** |
||
| 5578 | * Retrieve a remapping. |
||
| 5579 | * |
||
| 5580 | * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info. |
||
| 5581 | * |
||
| 5582 | * \param numFiles number of file paths. |
||
| 5583 | * |
||
| 5584 | * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed |
||
| 5585 | * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred. |
||
| 5586 | */ |
||
| 5587 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5588 | CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths, |
||
| 5589 | unsigned numFiles); |
||
| 5590 | |||
| 5591 | /** |
||
| 5592 | * Determine the number of remappings. |
||
| 5593 | */ |
||
| 5594 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping); |
||
| 5595 | |||
| 5596 | /** |
||
| 5597 | * Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping. |
||
| 5598 | * |
||
| 5599 | * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename. |
||
| 5600 | * |
||
| 5601 | * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original |
||
| 5602 | * is associated with. |
||
| 5603 | */ |
||
| 5604 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index, |
||
| 5605 | CXString *original, |
||
| 5606 | CXString *transformed); |
||
| 5607 | |||
| 5608 | /** |
||
| 5609 | * Dispose the remapping. |
||
| 5610 | */ |
||
| 5611 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping); |
||
| 5612 | |||
| 5613 | /** |
||
| 5614 | * @} |
||
| 5615 | */ |
||
| 5616 | |||
| 5617 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions |
||
| 5618 | * |
||
| 5619 | * @{ |
||
| 5620 | */ |
||
| 5621 | |||
| 5622 | enum CXVisitorResult { CXVisit_Break, CXVisit_Continue }; |
||
| 5623 | |||
| 5624 | typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor { |
||
| 5625 | void *context; |
||
| 5626 | enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange); |
||
| 5627 | } CXCursorAndRangeVisitor; |
||
| 5628 | |||
| 5629 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5630 | /** |
||
| 5631 | * Function returned successfully. |
||
| 5632 | */ |
||
| 5633 | CXResult_Success = 0, |
||
| 5634 | /** |
||
| 5635 | * One of the parameters was invalid for the function. |
||
| 5636 | */ |
||
| 5637 | CXResult_Invalid = 1, |
||
| 5638 | /** |
||
| 5639 | * The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned |
||
| 5640 | * CXVisit_Break) |
||
| 5641 | */ |
||
| 5642 | CXResult_VisitBreak = 2 |
||
| 5643 | |||
| 5644 | } CXResult; |
||
| 5645 | |||
| 5646 | /** |
||
| 5647 | * Find references of a declaration in a specific file. |
||
| 5648 | * |
||
| 5649 | * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one. |
||
| 5650 | * |
||
| 5651 | * \param file to search for references. |
||
| 5652 | * |
||
| 5653 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
||
| 5654 | * each reference found. |
||
| 5655 | * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside |
||
| 5656 | * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid. |
||
| 5657 | * |
||
| 5658 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
||
| 5659 | */ |
||
| 5660 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile( |
||
| 5661 | CXCursor cursor, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
||
| 5662 | |||
| 5663 | /** |
||
| 5664 | * Find #import/#include directives in a specific file. |
||
| 5665 | * |
||
| 5666 | * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query. |
||
| 5667 | * |
||
| 5668 | * \param file to search for #import/#include directives. |
||
| 5669 | * |
||
| 5670 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
||
| 5671 | * each directive found. |
||
| 5672 | * |
||
| 5673 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
||
| 5674 | */ |
||
| 5675 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile( |
||
| 5676 | CXTranslationUnit TU, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
||
| 5677 | |||
| 5678 | #ifdef __has_feature |
||
| 5679 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
||
| 5680 | |||
| 5681 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, |
||
| 5682 | CXSourceRange); |
||
| 5683 | |||
| 5684 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5685 | CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile, |
||
| 5686 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
||
| 5687 | |||
| 5688 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 5689 | CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile, |
||
| 5690 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
||
| 5691 | |||
| 5692 | #endif |
||
| 5693 | #endif |
||
| 5694 | |||
| 5695 | /** |
||
| 5696 | * The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile. |
||
| 5697 | */ |
||
| 5698 | typedef void *CXIdxClientFile; |
||
| 5699 | |||
| 5700 | /** |
||
| 5701 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity. |
||
| 5702 | */ |
||
| 5703 | typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity; |
||
| 5704 | |||
| 5705 | /** |
||
| 5706 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container |
||
| 5707 | * of entities. |
||
| 5708 | */ |
||
| 5709 | typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer; |
||
| 5710 | |||
| 5711 | /** |
||
| 5712 | * The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH |
||
| 5713 | * or module). |
||
| 5714 | */ |
||
| 5715 | typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile; |
||
| 5716 | |||
| 5717 | /** |
||
| 5718 | * Source location passed to index callbacks. |
||
| 5719 | */ |
||
| 5720 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5721 | void *ptr_data[2]; |
||
| 5722 | unsigned int_data; |
||
| 5723 | } CXIdxLoc; |
||
| 5724 | |||
| 5725 | /** |
||
| 5726 | * Data for ppIncludedFile callback. |
||
| 5727 | */ |
||
| 5728 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5729 | /** |
||
| 5730 | * Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive. |
||
| 5731 | */ |
||
| 5732 | CXIdxLoc hashLoc; |
||
| 5733 | /** |
||
| 5734 | * Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive. |
||
| 5735 | */ |
||
| 5736 | const char *filename; |
||
| 5737 | /** |
||
| 5738 | * The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to. |
||
| 5739 | */ |
||
| 5740 | CXFile file; |
||
| 5741 | int isImport; |
||
| 5742 | int isAngled; |
||
| 5743 | /** |
||
| 5744 | * Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module |
||
| 5745 | * import. |
||
| 5746 | */ |
||
| 5747 | int isModuleImport; |
||
| 5748 | } CXIdxIncludedFileInfo; |
||
| 5749 | |||
| 5750 | /** |
||
| 5751 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile. |
||
| 5752 | */ |
||
| 5753 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5754 | /** |
||
| 5755 | * Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule. |
||
| 5756 | */ |
||
| 5757 | CXFile file; |
||
| 5758 | /** |
||
| 5759 | * The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH. |
||
| 5760 | */ |
||
| 5761 | CXModule module; |
||
| 5762 | /** |
||
| 5763 | * Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules. |
||
| 5764 | */ |
||
| 5765 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5766 | /** |
||
| 5767 | * Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into |
||
| 5768 | * a module import. Applicable only for modules. |
||
| 5769 | */ |
||
| 5770 | int isImplicit; |
||
| 5771 | |||
| 5772 | } CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo; |
||
| 5773 | |||
| 5774 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5775 | CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0, |
||
| 5776 | CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1, |
||
| 5777 | CXIdxEntity_Function = 2, |
||
| 5778 | CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3, |
||
| 5779 | CXIdxEntity_Field = 4, |
||
| 5780 | CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5, |
||
| 5781 | |||
| 5782 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6, |
||
| 5783 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7, |
||
| 5784 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8, |
||
| 5785 | |||
| 5786 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9, |
||
| 5787 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10, |
||
| 5788 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11, |
||
| 5789 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12, |
||
| 5790 | |||
| 5791 | CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13, |
||
| 5792 | CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14, |
||
| 5793 | CXIdxEntity_Union = 15, |
||
| 5794 | |||
| 5795 | CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16, |
||
| 5796 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17, |
||
| 5797 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18, |
||
| 5798 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19, |
||
| 5799 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20, |
||
| 5800 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21, |
||
| 5801 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22, |
||
| 5802 | CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23, |
||
| 5803 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24, |
||
| 5804 | CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25, |
||
| 5805 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26, |
||
| 5806 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConcept = 27 |
||
| 5807 | |||
| 5808 | } CXIdxEntityKind; |
||
| 5809 | |||
| 5810 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5811 | CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0, |
||
| 5812 | CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1, |
||
| 5813 | CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2, |
||
| 5814 | CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3, |
||
| 5815 | CXIdxEntityLang_Swift = 4 |
||
| 5816 | } CXIdxEntityLanguage; |
||
| 5817 | |||
| 5818 | /** |
||
| 5819 | * Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to: |
||
| 5820 | * CXIdxEntity_Function |
||
| 5821 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass |
||
| 5822 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod |
||
| 5823 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod |
||
| 5824 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor |
||
| 5825 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction |
||
| 5826 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias |
||
| 5827 | */ |
||
| 5828 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5829 | CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0, |
||
| 5830 | CXIdxEntity_Template = 1, |
||
| 5831 | CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2, |
||
| 5832 | CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3 |
||
| 5833 | } CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind; |
||
| 5834 | |||
| 5835 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5836 | CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0, |
||
| 5837 | CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1, |
||
| 5838 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2, |
||
| 5839 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3 |
||
| 5840 | } CXIdxAttrKind; |
||
| 5841 | |||
| 5842 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5843 | CXIdxAttrKind kind; |
||
| 5844 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5845 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5846 | } CXIdxAttrInfo; |
||
| 5847 | |||
| 5848 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5849 | CXIdxEntityKind kind; |
||
| 5850 | CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind; |
||
| 5851 | CXIdxEntityLanguage lang; |
||
| 5852 | const char *name; |
||
| 5853 | const char *USR; |
||
| 5854 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5855 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
||
| 5856 | unsigned numAttributes; |
||
| 5857 | } CXIdxEntityInfo; |
||
| 5858 | |||
| 5859 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5860 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5861 | } CXIdxContainerInfo; |
||
| 5862 | |||
| 5863 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5864 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo; |
||
| 5865 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
||
| 5866 | CXCursor classCursor; |
||
| 5867 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
||
| 5868 | } CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo; |
||
| 5869 | |||
| 5870 | typedef enum { CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1 } CXIdxDeclInfoFlags; |
||
| 5871 | |||
| 5872 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5873 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo; |
||
| 5874 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5875 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5876 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer; |
||
| 5877 | /** |
||
| 5878 | * Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in |
||
| 5879 | * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions. |
||
| 5880 | */ |
||
| 5881 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer; |
||
| 5882 | int isRedeclaration; |
||
| 5883 | int isDefinition; |
||
| 5884 | int isContainer; |
||
| 5885 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer; |
||
| 5886 | /** |
||
| 5887 | * Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly |
||
| 5888 | * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties. |
||
| 5889 | */ |
||
| 5890 | int isImplicit; |
||
| 5891 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
||
| 5892 | unsigned numAttributes; |
||
| 5893 | |||
| 5894 | unsigned flags; |
||
| 5895 | |||
| 5896 | } CXIdxDeclInfo; |
||
| 5897 | |||
| 5898 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5899 | CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0, |
||
| 5900 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1, |
||
| 5901 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2 |
||
| 5902 | } CXIdxObjCContainerKind; |
||
| 5903 | |||
| 5904 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5905 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
| 5906 | CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind; |
||
| 5907 | } CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo; |
||
| 5908 | |||
| 5909 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5910 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *base; |
||
| 5911 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5912 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5913 | } CXIdxBaseClassInfo; |
||
| 5914 | |||
| 5915 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5916 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol; |
||
| 5917 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5918 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5919 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo; |
||
| 5920 | |||
| 5921 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5922 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols; |
||
| 5923 | unsigned numProtocols; |
||
| 5924 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo; |
||
| 5925 | |||
| 5926 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5927 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
||
| 5928 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo; |
||
| 5929 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
||
| 5930 | } CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo; |
||
| 5931 | |||
| 5932 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5933 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
||
| 5934 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
||
| 5935 | CXCursor classCursor; |
||
| 5936 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
||
| 5937 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
||
| 5938 | } CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo; |
||
| 5939 | |||
| 5940 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5941 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
| 5942 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter; |
||
| 5943 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter; |
||
| 5944 | } CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo; |
||
| 5945 | |||
| 5946 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5947 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
||
| 5948 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases; |
||
| 5949 | unsigned numBases; |
||
| 5950 | } CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo; |
||
| 5951 | |||
| 5952 | /** |
||
| 5953 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
||
| 5954 | * |
||
| 5955 | * This may be deprecated in a future version as this duplicates |
||
| 5956 | * the \c CXSymbolRole_Implicit bit in \c CXSymbolRole. |
||
| 5957 | */ |
||
| 5958 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5959 | /** |
||
| 5960 | * The entity is referenced directly in user's code. |
||
| 5961 | */ |
||
| 5962 | CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1, |
||
| 5963 | /** |
||
| 5964 | * An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method |
||
| 5965 | * via the dot syntax. |
||
| 5966 | */ |
||
| 5967 | CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2 |
||
| 5968 | } CXIdxEntityRefKind; |
||
| 5969 | |||
| 5970 | /** |
||
| 5971 | * Roles that are attributed to symbol occurrences. |
||
| 5972 | * |
||
| 5973 | * Internal: this currently mirrors low 9 bits of clang::index::SymbolRole with |
||
| 5974 | * higher bits zeroed. These high bits may be exposed in the future. |
||
| 5975 | */ |
||
| 5976 | typedef enum { |
||
| 5977 | CXSymbolRole_None = 0, |
||
| 5978 | CXSymbolRole_Declaration = 1 << 0, |
||
| 5979 | CXSymbolRole_Definition = 1 << 1, |
||
| 5980 | CXSymbolRole_Reference = 1 << 2, |
||
| 5981 | CXSymbolRole_Read = 1 << 3, |
||
| 5982 | CXSymbolRole_Write = 1 << 4, |
||
| 5983 | CXSymbolRole_Call = 1 << 5, |
||
| 5984 | CXSymbolRole_Dynamic = 1 << 6, |
||
| 5985 | CXSymbolRole_AddressOf = 1 << 7, |
||
| 5986 | CXSymbolRole_Implicit = 1 << 8 |
||
| 5987 | } CXSymbolRole; |
||
| 5988 | |||
| 5989 | /** |
||
| 5990 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
||
| 5991 | */ |
||
| 5992 | typedef struct { |
||
| 5993 | CXIdxEntityRefKind kind; |
||
| 5994 | /** |
||
| 5995 | * Reference cursor. |
||
| 5996 | */ |
||
| 5997 | CXCursor cursor; |
||
| 5998 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
||
| 5999 | /** |
||
| 6000 | * The entity that gets referenced. |
||
| 6001 | */ |
||
| 6002 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity; |
||
| 6003 | /** |
||
| 6004 | * Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example: |
||
| 6005 | * |
||
| 6006 | * \code |
||
| 6007 | * Foo *var; |
||
| 6008 | * \endcode |
||
| 6009 | * |
||
| 6010 | * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'. |
||
| 6011 | * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods, |
||
| 6012 | * the parentEntity will be the function/method. |
||
| 6013 | */ |
||
| 6014 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity; |
||
| 6015 | /** |
||
| 6016 | * Lexical container context of the reference. |
||
| 6017 | */ |
||
| 6018 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *container; |
||
| 6019 | /** |
||
| 6020 | * Sets of symbol roles of the reference. |
||
| 6021 | */ |
||
| 6022 | CXSymbolRole role; |
||
| 6023 | } CXIdxEntityRefInfo; |
||
| 6024 | |||
| 6025 | /** |
||
| 6026 | * A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and |
||
| 6027 | * #clang_indexTranslationUnit. |
||
| 6028 | */ |
||
| 6029 | typedef struct { |
||
| 6030 | /** |
||
| 6031 | * Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted. |
||
| 6032 | * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort. |
||
| 6033 | */ |
||
| 6034 | int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved); |
||
| 6035 | |||
| 6036 | /** |
||
| 6037 | * Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set. |
||
| 6038 | */ |
||
| 6039 | void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data, CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved); |
||
| 6040 | |||
| 6041 | CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data, CXFile mainFile, |
||
| 6042 | void *reserved); |
||
| 6043 | |||
| 6044 | /** |
||
| 6045 | * Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported. |
||
| 6046 | */ |
||
| 6047 | CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
| 6048 | const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *); |
||
| 6049 | |||
| 6050 | /** |
||
| 6051 | * Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported. |
||
| 6052 | * |
||
| 6053 | * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all |
||
| 6054 | * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST |
||
| 6055 | * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to |
||
| 6056 | * the AST file. |
||
| 6057 | */ |
||
| 6058 | CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
| 6059 | const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *); |
||
| 6060 | |||
| 6061 | /** |
||
| 6062 | * Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit. |
||
| 6063 | */ |
||
| 6064 | CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
| 6065 | void *reserved); |
||
| 6066 | |||
| 6067 | void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data, const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6068 | |||
| 6069 | /** |
||
| 6070 | * Called to index a reference of an entity. |
||
| 6071 | */ |
||
| 6072 | void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data, |
||
| 6073 | const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *); |
||
| 6074 | |||
| 6075 | } IndexerCallbacks; |
||
| 6076 | |||
| 6077 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind); |
||
| 6078 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo * |
||
| 6079 | clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6080 | |||
| 6081 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo * |
||
| 6082 | clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6083 | |||
| 6084 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 6085 | const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo * |
||
| 6086 | clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6087 | |||
| 6088 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo * |
||
| 6089 | clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6090 | |||
| 6091 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo * |
||
| 6092 | clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6093 | |||
| 6094 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo * |
||
| 6095 | clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *); |
||
| 6096 | |||
| 6097 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo * |
||
| 6098 | clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
||
| 6099 | |||
| 6100 | /** |
||
| 6101 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
||
| 6102 | * container. |
||
| 6103 | */ |
||
| 6104 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer |
||
| 6105 | clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *); |
||
| 6106 | |||
| 6107 | /** |
||
| 6108 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
||
| 6109 | * container. |
||
| 6110 | */ |
||
| 6111 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *, |
||
| 6112 | CXIdxClientContainer); |
||
| 6113 | |||
| 6114 | /** |
||
| 6115 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
||
| 6116 | */ |
||
| 6117 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity |
||
| 6118 | clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *); |
||
| 6119 | |||
| 6120 | /** |
||
| 6121 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
||
| 6122 | */ |
||
| 6123 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, |
||
| 6124 | CXIdxClientEntity); |
||
| 6125 | |||
| 6126 | /** |
||
| 6127 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
||
| 6128 | * translation units. |
||
| 6129 | */ |
||
| 6130 | typedef void *CXIndexAction; |
||
| 6131 | |||
| 6132 | /** |
||
| 6133 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
||
| 6134 | * translation units. |
||
| 6135 | * |
||
| 6136 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated. |
||
| 6137 | */ |
||
| 6138 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx); |
||
| 6139 | |||
| 6140 | /** |
||
| 6141 | * Destroy the given index action. |
||
| 6142 | * |
||
| 6143 | * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units |
||
| 6144 | * created within that index action have been destroyed. |
||
| 6145 | */ |
||
| 6146 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction); |
||
| 6147 | |||
| 6148 | typedef enum { |
||
| 6149 | /** |
||
| 6150 | * Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed. |
||
| 6151 | */ |
||
| 6152 | CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0, |
||
| 6153 | |||
| 6154 | /** |
||
| 6155 | * Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should |
||
| 6156 | * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does |
||
| 6157 | * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity. |
||
| 6158 | */ |
||
| 6159 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1, |
||
| 6160 | |||
| 6161 | /** |
||
| 6162 | * Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set |
||
| 6163 | * function-local symbols will be ignored. |
||
| 6164 | */ |
||
| 6165 | CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2, |
||
| 6166 | |||
| 6167 | /** |
||
| 6168 | * Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed. |
||
| 6169 | * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored. |
||
| 6170 | */ |
||
| 6171 | CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4, |
||
| 6172 | |||
| 6173 | /** |
||
| 6174 | * Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing. |
||
| 6175 | */ |
||
| 6176 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8, |
||
| 6177 | |||
| 6178 | /** |
||
| 6179 | * Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an |
||
| 6180 | * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object. |
||
| 6181 | * Bodies in system headers are always skipped. |
||
| 6182 | */ |
||
| 6183 | CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10 |
||
| 6184 | |||
| 6185 | } CXIndexOptFlags; |
||
| 6186 | |||
| 6187 | /** |
||
| 6188 | * Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
||
| 6189 | * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks. |
||
| 6190 | * |
||
| 6191 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
| 6192 | * be passed to the invoked callbacks. |
||
| 6193 | * |
||
| 6194 | * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client |
||
| 6195 | * implements. |
||
| 6196 | * |
||
| 6197 | * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets |
||
| 6198 | * passed in index_callbacks. |
||
| 6199 | * |
||
| 6200 | * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is |
||
| 6201 | * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags. |
||
| 6202 | * |
||
| 6203 | * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be |
||
| 6204 | * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it. |
||
| 6205 | * |
||
| 6206 | * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could |
||
| 6207 | * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
||
| 6208 | * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode. |
||
| 6209 | * |
||
| 6210 | * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit. |
||
| 6211 | */ |
||
| 6212 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile( |
||
| 6213 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
| 6214 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
||
| 6215 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
||
| 6216 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
| 6217 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
||
| 6218 | |||
| 6219 | /** |
||
| 6220 | * Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line |
||
| 6221 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
||
| 6222 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
||
| 6223 | */ |
||
| 6224 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv( |
||
| 6225 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
| 6226 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
||
| 6227 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
||
| 6228 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
||
| 6229 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
||
| 6230 | |||
| 6231 | /** |
||
| 6232 | * Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through |
||
| 6233 | * #IndexerCallbacks. |
||
| 6234 | * |
||
| 6235 | * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as |
||
| 6236 | * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be: |
||
| 6237 | * |
||
| 6238 | * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations |
||
| 6239 | * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations |
||
| 6240 | * -Diagnostic callback invocations |
||
| 6241 | * |
||
| 6242 | * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile. |
||
| 6243 | * |
||
| 6244 | * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
||
| 6245 | * non-zero, otherwise returns 0. |
||
| 6246 | */ |
||
| 6247 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit( |
||
| 6248 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
||
| 6249 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, CXTranslationUnit); |
||
| 6250 | |||
| 6251 | /** |
||
| 6252 | * Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by |
||
| 6253 | * the given CXIdxLoc. |
||
| 6254 | * |
||
| 6255 | * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the |
||
| 6256 | * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument |
||
| 6257 | * retrieves the location of the argument. |
||
| 6258 | */ |
||
| 6259 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc, |
||
| 6260 | CXIdxClientFile *indexFile, |
||
| 6261 | CXFile *file, unsigned *line, |
||
| 6262 | unsigned *column, |
||
| 6263 | unsigned *offset); |
||
| 6264 | |||
| 6265 | /** |
||
| 6266 | * Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc. |
||
| 6267 | */ |
||
| 6268 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
||
| 6269 | CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc); |
||
| 6270 | |||
| 6271 | /** |
||
| 6272 | * Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal. |
||
| 6273 | * |
||
| 6274 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by |
||
| 6275 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being |
||
| 6276 | * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to |
||
| 6277 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
||
| 6278 | * |
||
| 6279 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values |
||
| 6280 | * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
||
| 6281 | */ |
||
| 6282 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C, |
||
| 6283 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 6284 | |||
| 6285 | /** |
||
| 6286 | * Visit the fields of a particular type. |
||
| 6287 | * |
||
| 6288 | * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor, |
||
| 6289 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
||
| 6290 | * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if |
||
| 6291 | * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
||
| 6292 | * |
||
| 6293 | * \param T the record type whose field may be visited. |
||
| 6294 | * |
||
| 6295 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
||
| 6296 | * field of \p T. |
||
| 6297 | * |
||
| 6298 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
||
| 6299 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
||
| 6300 | * |
||
| 6301 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
||
| 6302 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
||
| 6303 | */ |
||
| 6304 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T, CXFieldVisitor visitor, |
||
| 6305 | CXClientData client_data); |
||
| 6306 | |||
| 6307 | /** |
||
| 6308 | * @} |
||
| 6309 | */ |
||
| 6310 | |||
| 6311 | /** |
||
| 6312 | * @} |
||
| 6313 | */ |
||
| 6314 | |||
| 6315 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_END |
||
| 6316 | |||
| 6317 | #endif |